1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children false
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
70 \font_sf_scale 100 100
71 \font_tt_scale 100 100
73 \use_dash_ligatures false
75 \default_output_format pdf2
77 \bibtex_command bibtex
78 \index_command default
82 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
83 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
87 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
88 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
89 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
94 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
95 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
98 \use_package amsmath 1
99 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package cancel 1
102 \use_package mathdots 1
103 \use_package mathtools 1
104 \use_package mhchem 1
105 \use_package stackrel 1
106 \use_package stmaryrd 1
107 \use_package undertilde 1
109 \cite_engine_type default
113 \paperorientation portrait
118 \notefontcolor #0000ff
135 \paragraph_separation skip
138 \math_numbering_side default
139 \quotes_style english
143 \paperpagestyle default
144 \tracking_changes true
145 \output_changes false
149 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
160 by the \SpecialChar LyX
165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
167 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
168 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
169 Documentation mailing list:
170 \begin_inset CommandInset href
172 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
184 \begin_inset Newline newline
188 \begin_inset Newline newline
192 \begin_inset Note Note
195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
196 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
197 \begin_inset Newline newline
202 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
210 \begin_layout Standard
211 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
212 LatexCommand tableofcontents
219 \begin_layout Chapter
223 \begin_layout Section
224 What is \SpecialChar LyX
228 \begin_layout Standard
230 is a document preparation system.
231 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
232 scripts, publishable books, business
233 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
234 It is unlike most other
235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
242 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
244 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
257 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
260 pt type, left justified, 5
261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
270 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
274 \begin_layout Standard
275 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
280 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
284 \begin_layout Standard
289 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
290 's philosophy: most importantly,
291 the format of all of the manuals.
292 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
293 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
299 manual describes that, too.
302 \begin_layout Section
307 \begin_layout Standard
308 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
309 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
311 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
312 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
316 \begin_layout Standard
317 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
318 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
319 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
321 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
322 only a vertical scrollbar.
323 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
324 The first case is large images.
325 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
326 image and use the option
337 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
340 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
341 this doesn't work for equations yet.
344 \begin_layout Standard
345 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
346 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
354 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
361 \begin_layout Section
365 \begin_layout Standard
366 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
368 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
370 Just select the manual you want to read from the
377 \begin_layout Section
378 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
382 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
389 \begin_layout Standard
390 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
391 can be configured via the menu
393 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
397 \begin_inset Index idx
400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
407 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
410 packages are available.
411 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
413 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
415 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
420 \begin_inset space \space{}
423 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
424 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
426 To force \SpecialChar LyX
427 to re-inspect your system, you should use
429 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
433 \begin_inset Index idx
436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
437 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
443 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
444 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
447 \begin_layout Section
450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
452 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
459 \begin_layout Standard
460 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
461 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
462 installed, but you will not be
463 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
464 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
465 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
466 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
467 document can always be output as plain text
471 \begin_layout Standard
472 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
473 or DocBook classes or packages.
474 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
475 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
478 \begin_layout Standard
479 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
480 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
481 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
484 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
492 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
493 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
496 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
500 \begin_inset Index idx
503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
504 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
512 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
519 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
523 \begin_layout Chapter
524 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
528 \begin_layout Section
529 Basic File Operations
530 \begin_inset Index idx
533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
542 \begin_layout Standard
547 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
548 in addition to some more advanced operations:
551 \begin_layout Itemize
573 \begin_layout Itemize
589 arg "buffer-new-template"
595 \begin_layout Itemize
617 \begin_layout Itemize
627 \begin_layout Itemize
641 \begin_layout Itemize
663 \begin_layout Itemize
675 arg "buffer-write-as"
681 \begin_layout Itemize
695 \begin_layout Itemize
709 \begin_layout Standard
710 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
711 a few minor differences.
714 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
725 command lists the available templates.
726 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
727 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
728 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
736 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
743 \begin_layout Standard
744 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
776 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
777 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
778 is just that — a big, blank space.
786 \begin_layout Standard
807 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
812 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
815 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
833 will reload the document from disk.
834 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
835 and want to restore it to the last save.
844 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
845 them as your changes.
848 \begin_layout Section
849 Basic Editing Features
850 \begin_inset Index idx
853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
860 \begin_inset CommandInset label
862 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
869 \begin_layout Standard
870 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
871 can perform cut and paste operations
872 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
873 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
874 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
875 editing features and how to access
877 We will start with cut and paste.
880 \begin_layout Standard
881 As you might expect, the
885 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
886 various other editing features.
887 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
891 \begin_layout Itemize
897 \begin_inset Index idx
900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
929 \begin_layout Itemize
935 \begin_inset Index idx
938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
967 \begin_layout Itemize
973 \begin_inset Index idx
976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1001 \begin_layout Itemize
1005 \begin_inset space ~
1011 \begin_layout Itemize
1015 \begin_inset space ~
1021 \begin_layout Itemize
1025 \begin_inset space ~
1029 \begin_inset space ~
1035 \begin_inset Index idx
1038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1047 \begin_inset Index idx
1050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1065 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1075 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1081 \begin_layout Standard
1082 The first three are self-explanatory.
1083 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1084 and other programs by
1105 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1106 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1111 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1112 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1113 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1114 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1115 into individual cells.
1119 \begin_inset space ~
1124 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1125 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1129 \begin_layout Standard
1133 \begin_inset space ~
1138 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1140 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1142 \begin_inset space ~
1149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1155 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1156 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1157 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1163 \begin_inset space \space{}
1166 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1167 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1170 \begin_inset space ~
1173 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1175 \begin_inset space ~
1179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1183 \begin_inset space ~
1192 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1193 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1195 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1199 \begin_inset space ~
1204 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1205 start a new paragraph.
1206 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1207 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1212 \begin_inset space ~
1215 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1217 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1221 \begin_inset space ~
1229 \begin_inset space ~
1232 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1235 paste from the primary selection.
1236 This is normally the currently selected text.
1239 \begin_layout Standard
1242 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1244 \begin_inset space ~
1248 \begin_inset space ~
1256 \begin_inset space ~
1260 \begin_inset space ~
1266 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1272 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1275 \begin_inset space ~
1284 \begin_inset space ~
1289 button to skip the current word.
1293 \begin_inset space ~
1298 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1302 \begin_inset space ~
1307 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1309 If the toggle is set, searching for
1310 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1321 will not match the word
1322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1336 Match whole words only
1338 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1339 to only find complete words, e.
1340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1369 offers also an advanced
1372 \begin_inset space ~
1376 \begin_inset space ~
1381 feature that is described in section
1382 \begin_inset space ~
1386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1388 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1395 \begin_layout Standard
1396 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1397 \begin_inset space \space{}
1401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1409 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1411 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1416 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1423 \begin_layout Standard
1427 arg "inset-select-all"
1430 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1431 When the cursor is inside an inset
1434 arg "inset-select-all"
1437 selects the content of the inset.
1441 arg "inset-select-all"
1444 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1449 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1452 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1456 \begin_layout Section
1458 \begin_inset Index idx
1461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1468 \begin_inset Index idx
1471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1480 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1487 \begin_layout Standard
1488 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1490 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1496 or the toolbar button
1502 to undo some mistake.
1503 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1505 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1508 or the toolbar button
1515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1522 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1526 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1529 \begin_layout Standard
1530 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1539 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1540 This is a consequence of the 100
1541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1544 step undo limit mentioned above.
1547 \begin_layout Standard
1556 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1558 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1562 \begin_layout Section
1564 \begin_inset Index idx
1567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1576 \begin_layout Standard
1577 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1580 \begin_layout Enumerate
1585 \begin_layout Itemize
1590 once anywhere in the edit window.
1591 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1595 \begin_layout Enumerate
1600 \begin_layout Itemize
1607 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1610 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1613 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1614 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1617 \begin_layout Itemize
1618 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1621 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1628 \begin_layout Enumerate
1629 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1633 \begin_layout Standard
1634 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1635 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1639 \begin_layout Section
1641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1643 name "sec:Navigating"
1648 \begin_inset Index idx
1651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1660 \begin_layout Standard
1662 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1665 \begin_layout Itemize
1670 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1671 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1674 \begin_layout Itemize
1675 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1677 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1679 \begin_inset space ~
1684 or by the toolbar button
1687 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1693 \begin_layout Itemize
1694 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1696 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1699 and use the same menu to return to them.
1700 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1703 \begin_layout Standard
1707 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1712 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1713 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1715 \begin_inset space ~
1720 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1721 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1722 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1723 your last editing position.
1726 \begin_layout Standard
1731 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1735 \begin_layout Subsection
1737 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1739 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1744 \begin_inset Index idx
1747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1748 Navigating ! Outline
1754 \begin_inset Index idx
1757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1766 \begin_layout Standard
1767 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1768 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1769 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1771 \begin_inset space ~
1775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1777 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1781 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1782 \begin_inset space ~
1786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1788 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1793 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1797 \begin_layout Standard
1798 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1799 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1800 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1801 dialog and to modify the citation.
1804 \begin_layout Standard
1809 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1810 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1812 Labels and References
1814 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1820 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1823 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1826 \begin_layout Standard
1827 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1828 you further to control the display.
1833 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1834 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1840 option keeps it in the current view state.
1841 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1842 \begin_inset space ~
1845 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1846 \begin_inset space ~
1849 3, the subsections of sections
1850 \begin_inset space ~
1853 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1858 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1859 \begin_inset space ~
1863 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1873 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1876 \begin_layout Standard
1883 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1884 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1898 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1899 So, for example, you can move section
1900 \begin_inset space ~
1904 \begin_inset space ~
1907 2.4 or after section
1908 \begin_inset space ~
1913 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1926 (or the corresponding key bindings
1934 ) you can change the level of sections.
1935 So you can for example make section
1936 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_inset space ~
1944 \begin_inset space ~
1950 \begin_layout Standard
1951 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1952 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1955 \begin_layout Subsection
1956 Horizontal Scrolling
1957 \begin_inset Index idx
1960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1961 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1969 \begin_layout Standard
1971 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1977 \begin_inset space \space{}
1981 \begin_inset space ~
1984 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1985 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1986 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1990 \begin_layout Standard
1991 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1995 \begin_layout Itemize
1997 is used on a small tablet computer
2000 \begin_layout Itemize
2001 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2013 \begin_inset space ~
2026 \begin_layout Itemize
2027 Math constructs with long command names
2030 \begin_layout Standard
2031 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2032 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2034 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2035 windows so that table
2036 \begin_inset space ~
2040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2042 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2047 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2049 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2050 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2053 \begin_layout Standard
2054 \begin_inset Float table
2061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2062 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2065 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2067 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2071 Horizontal scrolling test.
2079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2081 \begin_inset Tabular
2082 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2083 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2086 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2128 \begin_layout Section
2129 Input/Word Completion
2130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2132 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2137 \begin_inset Index idx
2140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2147 \begin_inset Index idx
2150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2181 \begin_layout Standard
2183 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2185 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2186 is used to propose completions.
2189 \begin_layout Standard
2190 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2193 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2198 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2205 \begin_inset space ~
2209 \begin_inset space ~
2214 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2218 \begin_inset space ~
2223 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2224 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2228 \begin_inset space ~
2234 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2235 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2236 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2237 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2240 \begin_layout Standard
2242 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2243 completions available.
2248 key to accept a proposed completion.
2249 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2250 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2251 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2258 \begin_layout Standard
2259 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2260 ing options for text.
2261 The special math option
2265 enables characters to be composed.
2266 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2267 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2270 , you can then input the characters
2271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2282 to a formula to get it.
2283 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2284 of the math toolbar.
2285 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2289 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2290 's installation folder.
2291 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2300 \begin_layout Section
2302 \begin_inset Index idx
2305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2312 \begin_inset Index idx
2315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2344 \begin_inset Index idx
2347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2378 \begin_layout Standard
2379 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2393 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2396 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2400 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2401 \begin_inset space ~
2405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2407 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2414 \begin_layout Standard
2418 \begin_inset space ~
2426 \begin_inset space ~
2447 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2451 \begin_layout Labeling
2452 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2456 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2457 LatexCommand nomenclature
2459 description "Tabulator key"
2466 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2468 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2469 \begin_inset space ~
2473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2475 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2482 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2486 , especially section
2487 \begin_inset space ~
2491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2493 reference "subsec:Lists"
2499 If you are still confused, look in the
2504 \begin_inset Newline newline
2512 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2513 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2517 \begin_layout Labeling
2518 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2522 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2523 LatexCommand nomenclature
2525 description "Escape key"
2533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2540 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2541 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2544 \begin_layout Labeling
2545 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2551 \begin_inset space ~
2555 \begin_inset space ~
2562 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2563 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2567 \begin_layout Standard
2568 There are three modifier keys:
2571 \begin_layout Labeling
2572 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2578 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2590 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2591 LatexCommand nomenclature
2593 description "Control key"
2598 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2599 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2603 \begin_layout Itemize
2612 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2615 \begin_layout Itemize
2624 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2627 \begin_layout Itemize
2636 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2640 \begin_layout Labeling
2641 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2659 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2660 LatexCommand nomenclature
2662 description "Shift key"
2667 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2668 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2671 \begin_layout Labeling
2672 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2690 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2691 LatexCommand nomenclature
2693 description "Alt or Meta key"
2698 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2699 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2700 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2706 \begin_inset Newline newline
2709 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2711 menu accelerator keys
2714 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2715 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2719 \begin_layout Standard
2720 For example, the sequence
2721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2727 \begin_inset space ~
2731 \begin_inset space ~
2737 \begin_inset space ~
2745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2764 \begin_inset space ~
2770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2780 \begin_layout Standard
2785 manual lists all other things bound to the
2793 \begin_layout Standard
2794 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2796 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2797 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2798 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2799 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2800 The \SpecialChar LyX
2801 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2802 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2803 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2805 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2821 followed by a capital
2828 \begin_layout Chapter
2831 \begin_inset Index idx
2834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2844 \begin_layout Section
2846 \begin_inset Index idx
2849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2858 \begin_layout Subsection
2862 \begin_layout Standard
2863 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2864 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2865 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2866 numbering schemes, and so on.
2867 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2868 and format the title of your document differently.
2871 \begin_layout Standard
2876 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2877 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2878 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2879 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2880 picks one for you by default.
2881 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2884 \begin_layout Subsection
2886 \begin_inset Index idx
2889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2898 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2905 \begin_layout Standard
2906 You can select a class using the
2908 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2909 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2913 \begin_inset Index idx
2916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2923 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2927 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2931 \begin_layout Standard
2932 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2937 \begin_layout Description
2938 Article for basic articles
2941 \begin_layout Description
2942 Report for basic reports
2945 \begin_layout Description
2946 Book for writing a book
2949 \begin_layout Description
2950 Letter for US-style letters
2953 \begin_layout Standard
2954 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2955 only uses if you have installed
2956 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2957 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2958 distributions will include
2960 Here are some of the classes.
2961 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2963 Special Document Classes
2972 \begin_layout Description
2973 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2976 \begin_layout Description
2977 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2981 \begin_layout Description
2982 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2986 \begin_layout Description
2987 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2988 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2989 There are three article layouts available.
2990 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2991 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2992 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2993 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2998 sequential numbering
2999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3002 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3003 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3004 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3005 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3008 \begin_layout Description
3009 Beamer Layout for presentations
3012 \begin_layout Description
3013 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3014 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3015 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3016 with \SpecialChar LyX
3020 \begin_layout Description
3021 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3024 \begin_layout Description
3026 \begin_inset space ~
3029 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3032 \begin_layout Description
3033 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3036 \begin_layout Description
3037 Foils Used to make transparencies
3040 \begin_layout Description
3041 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3042 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3043 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3044 with \SpecialChar LyX
3048 \begin_layout Description
3049 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3050 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3053 \begin_layout Description
3054 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3057 \begin_layout Description
3058 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3061 \begin_layout Description
3062 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3063 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3064 (Is used by this document.)
3067 \begin_layout Description
3068 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3071 \begin_layout Description
3072 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3075 \begin_layout Description
3080 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3081 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3083 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3087 \begin_layout Description
3088 Slides Used to make transparencies
3091 \begin_layout Description
3093 \begin_inset space ~
3096 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3097 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3100 \begin_layout Description
3101 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3104 \begin_layout Standard
3105 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3107 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3109 Special Document Classes
3116 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3117 of the document classes.
3120 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3124 \begin_layout Standard
3125 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3127 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3128 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3130 \begin_inset Index idx
3133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3150 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3151 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3153 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3156 \begin_layout Standard
3159 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3164 , are highly specialized.
3166 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3167 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3168 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3169 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3170 by some document class.
3171 There are just too many of them.
3172 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3175 \begin_layout Standard
3176 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3184 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3185 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3186 document class for a new file.
3188 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3191 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3198 manual for information on how to install them.
3199 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3205 \begin_layout Standard
3206 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3207 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3208 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3209 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3210 class files to be used for dissertation
3211 s submitted to those universities.
3212 The \SpecialChar LyX
3213 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3215 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3219 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3225 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3228 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3232 name "subsec:Modules"
3237 \begin_inset Index idx
3240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3249 \begin_layout Standard
3250 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3251 chosen document class.
3252 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3253 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3260 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3264 \begin_inset Index idx
3267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3274 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3278 \begin_layout Standard
3279 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3280 packages or file format converters that are not always
3281 installed by default.
3283 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3284 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3285 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3286 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3288 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3289 file without the missing prerequisites.
3290 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3291 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3294 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3298 \begin_inset Index idx
3301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3302 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3308 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3313 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3316 \begin_layout Standard
3317 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3325 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3327 will advise you about these things.
3335 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3339 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3344 \begin_inset Index idx
3347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3348 Document ! Local Layout
3356 \begin_layout Standard
3357 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3358 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3359 : They are intended to be used in
3360 a variety of different documents.
3361 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3362 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3363 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3364 need a specific inset or
3365 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3367 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757388
3370 style only that one time.
3371 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3373 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3391 manual for information on how to use it.
3394 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3398 \begin_layout Standard
3399 Each class has a default set of options.
3400 Here's a quick table describing them:
3403 \begin_layout Standard
3404 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3410 \begin_layout Standard
3412 \begin_inset Tabular
3413 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3414 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3415 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3416 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3417 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3418 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3419 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3873 \begin_layout Standard
3874 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3880 \begin_layout Standard
3881 You're probably also wondering what
3882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3886 \begin_inset space ~
3890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3894 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3895 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3900 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3905 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3915 headings, there are also
3923 headings, and so on.
3924 We will describe these headings fully in section
3925 \begin_inset space ~
3929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3931 reference "subsec:Headings"
3938 \begin_layout Subsection
3940 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3942 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3947 \begin_inset Index idx
3950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3957 \begin_inset Index idx
3960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3969 \begin_layout Standard
3970 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3972 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3979 \begin_inset space ~
3987 \begin_inset space ~
3992 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3994 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3995 doesn't support special options you want to
3996 use for your document.
3997 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3998 -class and its options, you have to read
4002 \begin_layout Standard
4006 \begin_inset space ~
4013 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4019 \begin_inset space ~
4024 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4025 You can choose between the following five options:
4028 \begin_layout Labeling
4029 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4034 Use default page style of current class.
4037 \begin_layout Labeling
4038 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4043 No page numbers or headings.
4046 \begin_layout Labeling
4047 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4055 \begin_layout Labeling
4056 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4061 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4062 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4063 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4064 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4067 \begin_layout Labeling
4068 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4073 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4074 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4080 \begin_inset Index idx
4083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4091 How they are defined is explained in section
4092 \begin_inset space ~
4096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4098 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4105 \begin_layout Standard
4106 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4107 \begin_inset space ~
4111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4113 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4120 \begin_layout Subsection
4121 Paper Size and Orientation
4122 \begin_inset Index idx
4125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4126 Document ! Paper size
4132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4134 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4141 \begin_layout Standard
4142 You can find the following options in the menu
4145 \begin_inset space ~
4152 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4156 \begin_inset Index idx
4159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4168 \begin_layout Labeling
4169 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4173 \begin_inset space ~
4178 What size paper to print on.
4183 \begin_layout Itemize
4189 \begin_layout Itemize
4195 \begin_layout Itemize
4201 \begin_layout Itemize
4207 \begin_layout Itemize
4210 US letter, US legal, US executive
4213 \begin_layout Itemize
4219 \begin_layout Itemize
4226 \begin_layout Labeling
4227 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4232 To choose whether to output as
4243 \begin_layout Labeling
4244 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4248 \begin_inset space ~
4253 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4254 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4257 \begin_layout Subsection
4259 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4261 name "subsec:Margins"
4266 \begin_inset Index idx
4269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4276 \begin_inset Index idx
4279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4288 \begin_layout Standard
4289 Paper margins are set in the menu
4291 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4295 \begin_inset Index idx
4298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4307 \begin_layout Standard
4308 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4309 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4310 the paper format and the font size into account.
4313 \begin_layout Subsection
4317 \begin_layout Standard
4318 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4324 That includes the paragraph environments.
4325 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4326 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4327 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4329 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4338 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4340 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4341 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4342 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4345 \begin_layout Section
4346 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4347 \begin_inset Index idx
4350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4351 Paragraph ! Indentation
4359 \begin_layout Subsection
4361 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4363 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4370 \begin_layout Standard
4371 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4372 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4375 \begin_layout Standard
4376 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4377 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4378 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4379 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4383 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4389 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4390 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4391 language than English.
4393 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4396 \begin_layout Standard
4397 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4398 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4399 into \SpecialChar LyX
4401 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4404 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4406 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4407 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4408 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4415 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4416 goes to produce a printable file.
4421 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4423 gives you the ability globally to change
4427 these pre-coded spacings.
4428 We will explain more later.
4431 \begin_layout Subsection
4432 Paragraph Separation
4433 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4435 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4440 \begin_inset Index idx
4443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4444 Paragraph ! Separation
4452 \begin_layout Standard
4460 \begin_inset space ~
4468 \begin_inset space ~
4475 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4479 \begin_inset Index idx
4482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4488 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4491 \begin_layout Subsection
4495 \begin_layout Standard
4496 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4499 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4501 \begin_inset space ~
4506 dialog and toggle the
4509 \begin_inset space ~
4514 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4517 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4521 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4522 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4526 \begin_layout Standard
4527 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4528 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4531 \begin_layout Subsection
4533 \begin_inset Index idx
4536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4537 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4545 \begin_layout Standard
4548 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4552 \begin_inset Index idx
4555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4564 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4568 \begin_inset space ~
4577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4578 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4584 \begin_inset Index idx
4587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4594 installed to use this feature.
4599 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4601 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4603 \begin_inset space ~
4608 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4609 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4612 \begin_layout Section
4613 Paragraph Environments
4614 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4616 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4621 \begin_inset Index idx
4624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4625 Paragraph ! Environments
4631 \begin_inset Index idx
4634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4635 Paragraph environments|(
4643 \begin_layout Subsection
4647 \begin_layout Standard
4648 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4651 \begin_layout Standard
4660 } \SpecialChar ldots
4670 \begin_inset Newline newline
4673 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4675 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4676 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4677 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4686 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4689 \begin_layout Standard
4690 A paragraph environment is simply a
4691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4698 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4699 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4700 scheme, labels, and so on.
4701 Additionally, you can
4702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4709 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4710 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4711 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4712 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4714 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4716 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4719 \begin_layout Standard
4720 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4721 \begin_inset Graphics
4722 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4728 at the left end of the toolbar.
4730 will change the environment of the
4734 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4735 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4736 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4740 \begin_layout Standard
4749 create a new paragraph using the
4753 paragraph environment.
4755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4762 because if you are in one of these environments:
4765 \begin_layout Itemize
4771 \begin_layout Itemize
4777 \begin_layout Itemize
4783 \begin_layout Itemize
4789 \begin_layout Itemize
4795 \begin_layout Itemize
4801 \begin_layout Itemize
4807 \begin_layout Standard
4809 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4813 , rather than resetting it to
4818 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4819 \begin_inset space ~
4823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4825 reference "sec:Nesting"
4832 \begin_layout Subsection
4836 \begin_layout Standard
4837 The default paragraph environment is
4842 It creates a plain paragraph.
4844 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4845 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4846 this manual) are in the
4853 \begin_layout Standard
4854 You can nest a paragraph using the
4858 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4866 \begin_layout Subsection
4868 \begin_inset Index idx
4871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4880 \begin_layout Standard
4881 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4882 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4891 for thanks or contact information.
4892 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4893 places all of this on a separate page
4894 along with today's date.
4895 For other types of documents, the title
4896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4903 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4907 \begin_layout Standard
4909 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4923 Here's how you use them:
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4927 Put the title of your document in the
4934 \begin_layout Itemize
4935 Put the author name in the
4942 \begin_layout Itemize
4943 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4944 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4950 Note that using this environment is optional.
4951 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4952 will automatically insert today's date.
4953 If you don't want a date, use the option
4955 Suppress default date on front page
4959 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4960 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4962 \begin_inset space ~
4970 \begin_layout Standard
4971 You can use footnotes to insert
4972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4976 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4979 or contact information.
4982 \begin_layout Subsection
4984 \begin_inset Index idx
4987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4996 name "subsec:Headings"
5003 \begin_layout Standard
5004 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5006 takes care of the numbering for you.
5009 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5011 \begin_inset Index idx
5014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5015 Section headings ! Numbered
5023 \begin_layout Standard
5024 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5028 \begin_layout Enumerate
5034 \begin_layout Enumerate
5040 \begin_layout Enumerate
5046 \begin_layout Enumerate
5052 \begin_layout Enumerate
5058 \begin_layout Enumerate
5064 \begin_layout Enumerate
5070 \begin_layout Standard
5072 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5073 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5074 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5077 \begin_layout Standard
5078 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5079 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5080 You group the book into chapters.
5082 does a similar grouping:
5085 \begin_layout Itemize
5090 is divided into either
5101 \begin_layout Itemize
5113 \begin_layout Itemize
5125 \begin_layout Itemize
5137 \begin_layout Itemize
5149 \begin_layout Itemize
5161 \begin_layout Standard
5162 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5170 Not all document types use the
5174 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5179 is the top-level heading.
5187 \begin_layout Standard
5192 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5193 labels it with its number,
5194 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5196 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5208 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5210 \begin_inset Index idx
5213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5214 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5222 \begin_layout Standard
5223 The unnumbered section headings have a
5224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5231 at the end of their name.
5232 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5233 the table of contents, see section
5234 \begin_inset space ~
5238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5247 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5248 Changing the Numbering
5249 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5251 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5258 \begin_layout Standard
5259 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5260 in the Table of Contents.
5261 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5263 Just as certain classes start with
5277 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5287 This is something you can change.
5290 \begin_layout Standard
5293 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5297 \begin_inset Index idx
5300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5309 \begin_inset space ~
5313 \begin_inset space ~
5318 you will see two counters.
5323 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5324 numbers a section heading.
5325 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5329 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5330 Short Titles of Headings
5331 \begin_inset Index idx
5334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5335 Section headings ! Short titles
5341 \begin_inset Argument 1
5344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5351 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5353 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5360 \begin_layout Standard
5361 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5362 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5363 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5364 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5367 \begin_layout Standard
5369 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5370 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5371 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5372 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5375 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5377 \begin_inset space ~
5383 This will insert a box labeled
5384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5388 \begin_inset space ~
5392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5395 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5396 This also works for captions inside floats.
5397 There can only be one short title per title.
5400 \begin_layout Standard
5401 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5404 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5408 \begin_layout Standard
5409 The following information applies to all section headings:
5412 \begin_layout Itemize
5413 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5416 \begin_layout Itemize
5417 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5420 \begin_layout Itemize
5421 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5424 \begin_layout Itemize
5425 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5428 \begin_layout Subsection
5432 \begin_layout Standard
5434 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5448 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5449 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5450 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5451 the text they contain.
5452 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5460 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5463 \begin_layout Standard
5464 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5473 when you start a new paragraph.
5474 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5478 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5479 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5480 have to change back to the
5484 environment yourself.
5487 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5496 \begin_inset Index idx
5499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5508 \begin_layout Standard
5509 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5510 time for the differences.
5519 are identical except for one difference:
5523 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5532 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5535 \begin_layout Standard
5536 Here's an example of the
5549 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5551 See – no indentation!
5555 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5556 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5557 the other paragraph.
5560 \begin_layout Standard
5561 Here's another example, this time in the
5568 \begin_layout Quotation
5574 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5575 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5576 the first line, then
5580 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5584 you were quoting other text.
5587 \begin_layout Quotation
5588 Here's a new paragraph.
5589 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5590 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5593 \begin_layout Standard
5594 As the examples show,
5598 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5599 They should put quotes in the
5604 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5608 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5611 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5613 \begin_inset Index idx
5616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5623 \begin_inset Index idx
5626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5642 \begin_layout Standard
5647 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5653 \begin_inset Newline newline
5656 Which I did not rehearse!
5660 It could be much worse.
5661 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5663 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5664 indented a bit more than the first.
5665 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5671 \begin_inset Newline newline
5674 And make things look fine
5675 \begin_inset Newline newline
5681 arg "newline-insert newline"
5687 \begin_layout Standard
5692 does not indent both margins.
5693 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5694 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5697 arg "newline-insert newline"
5703 \begin_layout Subsection
5705 \begin_inset Index idx
5708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5715 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5724 \begin_layout Standard
5726 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5736 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5737 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5746 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5747 lets you provide your own label.
5748 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5749 describing some general features of all four of them.
5752 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5756 \begin_layout Standard
5757 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5759 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5760 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5769 reset the environment to
5773 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5774 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5775 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5779 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5783 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5790 \begin_layout Standard
5791 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5792 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5793 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5795 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5796 you read all of section
5797 \begin_inset space ~
5801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5803 reference "sec:Nesting"
5810 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5812 \begin_inset Index idx
5815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5822 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5831 \begin_layout Standard
5832 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5836 paragraph environment.
5837 It has the following properties:
5840 \begin_layout Itemize
5841 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5845 \begin_layout Itemize
5847 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5850 \begin_layout Itemize
5851 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5855 \begin_layout Itemize
5856 The items can have any length.
5858 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5859 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5866 \begin_layout Itemize
5871 environment inside another
5875 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5879 \begin_layout Itemize
5880 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5883 \begin_layout Itemize
5885 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5888 \begin_layout Itemize
5890 \begin_inset space ~
5894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5896 reference "sec:Nesting"
5900 for a full explanation of nesting.
5904 \begin_layout Standard
5905 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5914 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5917 \begin_layout Standard
5918 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5919 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5922 \begin_layout Itemize
5923 The label for the first level
5927 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5931 \begin_layout Itemize
5932 The label for the second level is a dash.
5936 \begin_layout Itemize
5937 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5941 \begin_layout Itemize
5942 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5946 \begin_layout Itemize
5947 Back out to the third level.
5951 \begin_layout Itemize
5952 Back to the second level.
5956 \begin_layout Itemize
5957 Back to the outermost level.
5960 \begin_layout Standard
5961 These are the default labels for an
5966 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5968 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5971 dialog in the submenu
5976 \begin_inset Index idx
5979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5985 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5989 \begin_layout Standard
5990 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5991 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5993 \begin_inset space ~
5997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5999 reference "sec:Nesting"
6006 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6008 \begin_inset Index idx
6011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6018 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6020 name "sec:Enumerate"
6027 \begin_layout Standard
6032 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6033 It has these properties:
6036 \begin_layout Enumerate
6037 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6041 \begin_layout Enumerate
6042 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6046 \begin_layout Enumerate
6048 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6051 \begin_layout Enumerate
6056 environment resets the counter to one.
6059 \begin_layout Enumerate
6072 \begin_layout Enumerate
6073 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6074 Items can have any length.
6077 \begin_layout Enumerate
6078 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6081 \begin_layout Enumerate
6082 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6085 \begin_layout Enumerate
6086 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6090 \begin_layout Standard
6099 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6101 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6102 labels the four different levels in an
6109 \begin_layout Enumerate
6110 The first level of an
6114 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6118 \begin_layout Enumerate
6119 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6123 \begin_layout Enumerate
6124 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6128 \begin_layout Enumerate
6129 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6132 \begin_layout Enumerate
6133 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6138 \begin_layout Enumerate
6139 Back to the third level
6143 \begin_layout Enumerate
6144 Back to the second level.
6148 \begin_layout Enumerate
6149 Back to the outermost level.
6152 \begin_layout Standard
6153 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6157 environment, see section
6158 \begin_inset space ~
6162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6164 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6169 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6173 \begin_layout Standard
6174 There is more to nesting
6178 environments than we've stated here.
6179 You should read section
6180 \begin_inset space ~
6184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6186 reference "sec:Nesting"
6190 to learn more about nesting.
6193 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6195 \begin_inset Index idx
6198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6207 \begin_layout Standard
6208 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6212 list has no fixed label.
6213 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6222 of the first line as the label.
6226 \begin_layout Description
6227 Example: This is an example of the
6234 \begin_layout Standard
6236 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6240 \begin_layout Standard
6242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6249 it is meant that the first usage of the
6253 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6255 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6263 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6268 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6269 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6271 \begin_inset space ~
6277 \begin_inset space ~
6281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6283 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6287 for more information.) Here is an example:
6290 \begin_layout Description
6292 \begin_inset space ~
6295 Example: This one shows how to use a
6298 \begin_inset space ~
6310 \begin_layout Description
6311 Usage: You should use the
6315 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6316 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6318 It's not a good idea to use a
6322 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6323 You're better off using
6335 paragraphs into them.
6338 \begin_layout Description
6339 Nesting: You can nest
6343 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6347 \begin_layout Standard
6348 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6349 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6350 them from the first line.
6353 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6355 \begin_inset Index idx
6358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6367 \begin_layout Standard
6372 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6373 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6377 \begin_layout Standard
6386 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6388 Here are its properties:
6391 \begin_layout Labeling
6392 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6394 \begin_inset space ~
6397 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6406 of each line as the item label.
6411 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6412 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6413 space as described above.
6416 \begin_layout Labeling
6417 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6418 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6419 uses different margins for the item label and the
6420 body of the item text.
6421 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6422 label width plus a little extra space.
6426 \begin_layout Labeling
6427 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6429 \begin_inset space ~
6432 width \SpecialChar LyX
6433 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6434 If the label width is larger, the label
6435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6442 into the first line.
6443 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6444 margin of the rest of the item text.
6447 \begin_layout Labeling
6448 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6450 \begin_inset space ~
6453 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6458 environment has the same left margin.
6459 \begin_inset Newline newline
6462 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6465 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6467 \begin_inset space ~
6472 dialog (toolbar button
6475 arg "layout-paragraph"
6482 \begin_inset space ~
6487 determines the default label width.
6488 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6497 multiple times instead.
6498 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6508 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6511 \begin_inset space ~
6516 every time you alter a label in a
6521 \begin_inset Newline newline
6524 The predefined default width is the length of
6525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6533 \begin_inset space ~
6539 \begin_layout Standard
6544 list the same way as the
6548 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6554 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6558 \begin_layout Standard
6563 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6564 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6566 \begin_inset space ~
6570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6572 reference "sec:Nesting"
6576 to learn about nesting.
6579 \begin_layout Standard
6580 There is yet another feature of the
6584 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6585 left-justifies the item labels by
6587 You can use additional
6591 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6592 justifies the item label.
6597 are documented in section
6598 \begin_inset space ~
6602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6604 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6609 Here are some examples:
6612 \begin_layout Labeling
6613 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6614 Left The default for
6621 \begin_layout Labeling
6622 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6623 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6630 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6633 \begin_layout Labeling
6634 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6635 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6639 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6646 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6649 \begin_layout Subsection
6651 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6653 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6658 \begin_inset Index idx
6661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6670 \begin_layout Standard
6671 The features described in this section require that the module
6673 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6675 is loaded in the document settings.
6676 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6682 \begin_inset Index idx
6685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6695 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6696 Custom Enumerate Lists
6697 \begin_inset Index idx
6700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6701 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6709 \begin_layout Standard
6711 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6714 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6717 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6718 There you add the command
6721 \begin_layout Standard
6729 \begin_layout Standard
6741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6742 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6743 Code, look at section
6744 \begin_inset space ~
6748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6750 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6763 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6770 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6771 For capital Roman numerals replace
6783 in the command above.
6784 For Arabic numerals use
6792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6799 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6814 \begin_layout Standard
6816 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6824 You can only number 26
6825 \begin_inset space ~
6828 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6836 \begin_layout Standard
6837 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6838 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6841 \begin_layout Standard
6842 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6845 \begin_layout Enumerate
6846 \begin_inset Argument 1
6849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6875 \begin_layout Enumerate
6876 \begin_inset Argument 1
6879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6902 \begin_layout Enumerate
6907 \begin_layout Enumerate
6908 \begin_inset Argument 1
6911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6935 \begin_layout Enumerate
6936 \begin_inset Argument 1
6939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6965 \begin_layout Standard
6966 For this list these commands were used:
6969 \begin_layout Standard
6980 \begin_inset Newline newline
6988 \begin_inset Newline newline
6996 \begin_inset Newline newline
7006 \begin_layout Standard
7013 makes the label emphasized and
7022 \begin_layout Standard
7023 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7031 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7032 lists until you change the definition.
7040 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7042 \begin_inset Index idx
7045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7046 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7054 \begin_layout Standard
7055 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7058 \begin_layout Enumerate
7059 \begin_inset Argument 1
7062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7081 \begin_inset Note Note
7084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7085 goes back to default numbering
7093 \begin_layout Enumerate
7097 \begin_layout Standard
7101 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7105 \begin_layout Standard
7106 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7111 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7112 to indicate that it is a resumed
7113 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7114 , but in the output.
7117 \begin_layout Standard
7118 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7126 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7135 \begin_layout Standard
7136 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7138 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7139 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7140 of a normal enumeration.
7141 There, insert the command
7144 \begin_layout Standard
7150 \begin_layout Standard
7155 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7159 \begin_layout Enumerate
7163 \begin_layout Enumerate
7167 \begin_layout Standard
7168 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7171 \begin_layout Enumerate
7172 \begin_inset Argument 1
7175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7191 This enumeration starts at 4
7194 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7196 \begin_inset Index idx
7199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7208 \begin_layout Standard
7209 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7211 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7214 \begin_layout Itemize
7218 \begin_layout Itemize
7219 with standard spacing
7222 \begin_layout Standard
7223 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7225 Add there the command
7229 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7232 \begin_layout Itemize
7233 \begin_inset Argument 1
7236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7255 \begin_layout Itemize
7259 \begin_layout Itemize
7263 \begin_layout Standard
7264 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7271 \begin_inset Index idx
7274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7282 For more information see its documentation,
7283 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7293 \begin_layout Standard
7294 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7296 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7297 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7301 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7304 \begin_layout Enumerate
7305 \begin_inset Argument 1
7308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7316 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7329 \begin_layout Enumerate
7330 with negative indentation
7333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7334 Further Customization
7335 \begin_inset Index idx
7338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7339 Lists ! Customization
7347 \begin_layout Standard
7348 You can also change the style of description lists.
7352 \begin_layout Standard
7358 \begin_layout Standard
7359 changes the description label font, the command
7362 \begin_layout Standard
7368 \begin_layout Standard
7369 sets the list style.
7372 \begin_layout Standard
7373 An example where the command
7376 \begin_layout Standard
7381 itshape, style=nextline
7384 \begin_layout Standard
7388 \begin_layout Description
7390 \begin_inset space ~
7394 \begin_inset Argument 1
7397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7403 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7405 itshape, style=nextline
7415 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7416 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7420 \begin_layout Description
7422 \begin_inset space ~
7425 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7426 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7427 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7430 \begin_layout Standard
7431 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7437 \begin_inset Index idx
7440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7448 For more information see its documentation
7449 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7459 \begin_layout Subsection
7461 \begin_inset Index idx
7464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7473 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7475 \begin_inset space ~
7478 Address: An Overview
7481 \begin_layout Standard
7482 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7483 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7491 \begin_inset space ~
7497 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7498 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7499 gags on the document.
7500 In contrast, you can use the
7507 \begin_inset space ~
7512 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7513 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7517 \begin_layout Standard
7518 Of course, you're not limited to using
7525 \begin_inset space ~
7534 \begin_inset space ~
7539 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7540 some European academic papers.
7543 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7545 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7547 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7554 \begin_layout Standard
7559 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7560 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7564 \begin_inset space ~
7569 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7570 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7571 Here's an example of each:
7574 \begin_layout Right Address
7576 \begin_inset Newline newline
7580 \begin_inset Newline newline
7584 \begin_inset Newline newline
7587 When is it? What is today?
7590 \begin_layout Standard
7594 \begin_inset space ~
7600 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7602 the largest block of text on a single line.
7603 Here's an example of the
7610 \begin_layout Address
7612 \begin_inset Newline newline
7615 Where do I send this
7616 \begin_inset Newline newline
7619 Your post office and country
7622 \begin_layout Standard
7623 As you can see, both
7630 \begin_inset space ~
7635 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7640 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7641 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7647 This makes sense, since
7655 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7656 Thus, you have to use
7663 arg "newline-insert newline"
7668 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7669 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7671 \begin_inset space ~
7675 \begin_inset space ~
7680 ) to start a new line in an
7687 \begin_inset space ~
7695 \begin_layout Subsection
7699 \begin_layout Standard
7700 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7701 or list of references.
7703 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7706 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7708 \begin_inset Index idx
7711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7720 \begin_layout Standard
7725 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7726 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7727 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7728 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7742 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7743 The book document classes ignores the
7747 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7751 in a letter document class.
7754 \begin_layout Standard
7759 environment does several things for you.
7760 First, it puts the centered label
7761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7769 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7771 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7772 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7773 the subsequent text.
7774 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7776 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7780 \begin_layout Standard
7781 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7785 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7786 The new paragraph will still be in the
7791 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7792 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7795 \begin_layout Standard
7796 \begin_inset Float figure
7803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7805 \begin_inset Graphics
7806 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7814 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7819 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7840 \begin_layout Standard
7841 We would love to demonstrate the
7845 environment, but since this document is in the
7846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7853 class, we can't do this.
7854 We inserted it therefore as figure
7855 \begin_inset space ~
7859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7861 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7866 If you have never heard of an
7867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7874 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7877 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7879 \begin_inset Index idx
7882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7889 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7891 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7898 \begin_layout Standard
7903 environment is used to list references.
7904 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7905 only use it at the end of the document.
7917 \begin_layout Standard
7918 When you first open a
7922 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7923 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7928 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7932 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7936 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7939 depending on the document class.
7940 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7941 Each paragraph of the
7945 environment is a bibliography entry.
7950 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7951 Each new paragraph is still in the
7958 \begin_layout Standard
7959 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7960 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7962 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7964 handling, have a look at section
7965 \begin_inset space ~
7969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7971 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7978 \begin_layout Subsection
7979 Special Environments
7982 \begin_layout Standard
7984 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7985 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7988 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7993 \begin_inset Index idx
7996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8004 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8006 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8013 \begin_layout Standard
8019 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8021 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8026 key as a fixed whitespace.
8030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8043 \begin_inset space ~
8048 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8066 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8069 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8072 arg "newline-insert newline"
8089 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8090 So, when you finish using the
8095 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8096 Also, you can nest the
8101 environment inside of others.
8104 \begin_layout Standard
8105 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8108 \begin_layout Itemize
8112 arg "newline-insert newline"
8115 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8116 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8120 \begin_inset space \space{}
8130 arg "newline-insert newline"
8136 \begin_layout Itemize
8140 arg "newline-insert newline"
8150 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8156 \begin_layout Itemize
8157 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8158 You must put at least one
8162 in any line you want blank.
8163 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8167 \begin_layout Itemize
8168 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8172 since that will insert
8177 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8180 arg "self-insert \""
8186 \begin_layout Standard
8190 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8194 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8198 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8202 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8206 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8207 printf("Hello World!
8212 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8216 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8220 \begin_layout Standard
8221 This is just the standard
8222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8233 \begin_layout Standard
8239 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8241 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8242 as if you used a typewriter.
8243 \begin_inset Index idx
8246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8247 Paragraph environments|)
8252 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8255 Program Code Listings
8260 \begin_inset space ~
8268 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8272 \begin_inset Index idx
8275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8284 \begin_layout Standard
8289 environment is similar to the
8294 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8295 computer console text.
8300 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8314 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8315 you can have empty lines.
8328 \begin_layout Itemize
8329 have a certain language and a text style
8332 \begin_layout Itemize
8333 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8334 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8335 and \SpecialChar TeX
8339 \begin_layout Standard
8340 Because of these properties
8344 works like a typewriter.
8348 \begin_layout Verbatim
8353 \begin_layout Verbatim
8357 The following 2 lines are empty:
8360 \begin_layout Verbatim
8364 \begin_layout Verbatim
8368 \begin_layout Verbatim
8370 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8375 \begin_layout Standard
8380 environment is identical to
8384 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8385 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8392 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8397 \begin_layout Section
8398 Nesting Environments
8399 \begin_inset Index idx
8402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8403 Nesting ! Environments
8409 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8418 \begin_layout Subsection
8422 \begin_layout Standard
8424 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8426 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8428 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8430 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8442 \begin_layout Enumerate
8446 \begin_layout Enumerate
8451 \begin_layout Enumerate
8455 \begin_layout Enumerate
8460 \begin_layout Enumerate
8464 \begin_layout Standard
8465 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8466 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8468 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8470 \begin_inset space ~
8474 \begin_inset space ~
8482 \begin_inset space ~
8486 \begin_inset space ~
8491 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8493 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8496 arg "depth-increment"
8502 arg "depth-decrement"
8516 arg "depth-increment"
8522 arg "depth-decrement"
8526 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8527 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8531 \begin_layout Standard
8532 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8533 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8534 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8535 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8536 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8539 \begin_layout Standard
8540 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8542 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8544 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8547 \begin_layout Subsection
8548 What You Can and Can't Nest
8551 \begin_layout Standard
8552 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8553 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8556 \begin_layout Standard
8557 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8558 than a simple yes or no.
8559 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8562 \begin_layout Itemize
8563 Completely unnestable
8566 \begin_layout Itemize
8567 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8571 \begin_layout Itemize
8572 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8576 \begin_layout Standard
8577 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8578 environments have them:
8581 \begin_layout Description
8582 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8583 Can't nest into them.
8587 \begin_layout Itemize
8593 \begin_layout Itemize
8599 \begin_layout Itemize
8605 \begin_layout Itemize
8611 \begin_layout Itemize
8618 \begin_layout Description
8620 \begin_inset space ~
8623 Nestable You can nest them.
8624 You can nest other things into them.
8628 \begin_layout Itemize
8634 \begin_layout Itemize
8640 \begin_layout Itemize
8646 \begin_layout Itemize
8652 \begin_layout Itemize
8658 \begin_layout Itemize
8664 \begin_layout Itemize
8670 \begin_layout Itemize
8677 \begin_layout Itemize
8683 \begin_layout Itemize
8690 \begin_layout Description
8691 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8692 You can't nest anything into them.
8696 \begin_layout Itemize
8702 \begin_layout Itemize
8708 \begin_layout Itemize
8714 \begin_layout Itemize
8720 \begin_layout Itemize
8726 \begin_layout Itemize
8732 \begin_layout Itemize
8738 \begin_layout Itemize
8744 \begin_layout Itemize
8750 \begin_layout Itemize
8756 \begin_layout Itemize
8762 \begin_layout Itemize
8768 \begin_layout Itemize
8774 \begin_layout Itemize
8778 \begin_inset space ~
8784 \begin_layout Itemize
8791 \begin_layout Standard
8792 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8800 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8810 \begin_inset space ~
8813 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8814 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8815 nested section headings violate this.
8823 \begin_layout Subsection
8824 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8825 \begin_inset Index idx
8828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8829 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8837 \begin_layout Standard
8838 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8839 affected by nesting anyhow.
8843 \begin_layout Itemize
8847 \begin_layout Itemize
8851 \begin_layout Itemize
8855 \begin_layout Standard
8857 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8865 Figures and tables in
8869 are not affected by this.
8874 Have a look at section
8875 \begin_inset space ~
8879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8881 reference "sec:Floats"
8885 for more information about
8892 \begin_layout Standard
8894 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8895 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8899 \begin_layout Standard
8900 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8908 of its own, it behaves just like a
8909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8916 paragraph environment.
8917 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8921 \begin_layout Standard
8922 Here's an example with a table:
8925 \begin_layout Enumerate
8930 \begin_layout Enumerate
8931 This is (a) and it's nested.
8935 \begin_layout Standard
8936 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8942 \begin_layout Standard
8944 \begin_inset Tabular
8945 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8946 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8947 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8948 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9032 \begin_layout Standard
9033 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9040 \begin_layout Enumerate
9042 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9046 \begin_layout Enumerate
9050 \begin_layout Standard
9051 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9054 \begin_layout Enumerate
9059 \begin_layout Enumerate
9060 This is (a) and it's nested.
9064 \begin_layout Standard
9065 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9071 \begin_layout Standard
9073 \begin_inset Tabular
9074 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9075 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9076 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9077 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9161 \begin_layout Standard
9162 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9168 \begin_layout Enumerate
9175 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9178 \begin_layout Enumerate
9182 \begin_layout Standard
9183 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9187 \begin_layout Standard
9188 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9191 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9194 \begin_layout Enumerate
9199 \begin_layout Enumerate
9200 This is (a) and it's nested.
9203 \begin_layout Standard
9204 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9210 \begin_layout Standard
9212 \begin_inset Tabular
9213 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9214 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9215 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9216 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9301 \begin_layout Standard
9302 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9308 \begin_layout Enumerate
9310 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9317 \begin_layout Enumerate
9321 \begin_layout Standard
9322 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9328 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9329 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9333 \begin_layout Subsection
9334 Usage and General Features
9337 \begin_layout Standard
9338 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9339 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9348 is the innermost possible depth.
9349 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9352 \begin_layout Enumerate
9353 level #1 – outermost
9357 \begin_layout Enumerate
9362 \begin_layout Enumerate
9367 \begin_layout Enumerate
9372 \begin_layout Itemize
9377 \begin_layout Itemize
9386 \begin_layout Standard
9387 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9388 both of them in the example.
9389 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9399 For example, if we tried to nest another
9404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9411 , we would get errors.
9414 \begin_layout Subsection
9416 \begin_inset Index idx
9419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9428 \begin_layout Standard
9429 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9430 We have several examples of nested environments.
9431 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9435 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9436 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9439 \begin_layout Labeling
9440 \labelwidthstring MMM
9441 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9450 \begin_layout Labeling
9451 \labelwidthstring MMM
9452 #2-a This is level #2.
9453 We created it by using
9456 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9462 arg "depth-increment"
9469 \begin_layout Labeling
9470 \labelwidthstring MMM
9471 #3-a This is level #3.
9472 This time, we just enter
9479 arg "depth-increment"
9483 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9487 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9493 arg "depth-increment"
9500 \begin_layout Standard
9505 environment, nested inside of
9506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9514 So, it's at level #4.
9515 We did this by entering
9518 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9524 arg "depth-increment"
9527 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9532 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9548 \begin_layout Standard
9553 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9556 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9562 \begin_layout Labeling
9563 \labelwidthstring MMM
9564 #4-a This is level #4.
9568 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9571 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9576 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9580 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9585 keep nesting things inside
9586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9597 \begin_layout Labeling
9598 \labelwidthstring MMM
9599 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9604 \begin_layout Labeling
9605 \labelwidthstring MMM
9606 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9607 and this is level #6.
9608 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9612 \begin_layout Labeling
9613 \labelwidthstring MMM
9614 #5-b Back to level #5.
9618 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9624 arg "depth-decrement"
9631 \begin_layout Labeling
9632 \labelwidthstring MMM
9636 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9642 arg "depth-decrement"
9645 , we're back at level #4.
9649 \begin_layout Labeling
9650 \labelwidthstring MMM
9651 #3-b Back to level #3.
9652 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9656 \begin_layout Labeling
9657 \labelwidthstring MMM
9658 #2-b Back to level #2.
9663 \begin_layout Labeling
9664 \labelwidthstring MMM
9665 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9666 After this sentence, we will enter
9670 and change the paragraph environment back to
9677 \begin_layout Standard
9678 We could have also used the
9694 environment in place of the
9699 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9702 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9703 Example 2: Inheritance
9706 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9707 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9710 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9719 arg "depth-increment"
9723 \begin_inset Newline newline
9726 which, we will change to the
9734 \begin_layout Enumerate
9739 environment, at level #2.
9742 \begin_layout Enumerate
9743 Notice how the nested
9747 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9751 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9755 \begin_layout Standard
9756 We ended this example by entering
9761 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9765 and reset the nesting depth by using
9768 arg "depth-decrement"
9774 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9775 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9784 \begin_inset Argument 1
9787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9788 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9796 \begin_layout Enumerate
9797 This is level #1, in an
9801 paragraph environment.
9802 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9806 \begin_layout Enumerate
9811 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9817 arg "depth-increment"
9821 Now, what happens if we nest an
9825 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9826 label be? An asterisk?
9830 \begin_layout Itemize
9840 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9841 So, its label is a bullet.
9842 (We got here by using
9845 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9851 arg "depth-increment"
9854 , then changing the environment to
9862 \begin_layout Itemize
9863 Here's level #4, produced using
9866 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9872 arg "depth-increment"
9876 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9881 \begin_layout Enumerate
9884 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9889 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9893 , because we are in the
9901 environment (that is, it is an
9916 \begin_layout Enumerate
9921 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9922 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9926 \begin_layout Enumerate
9927 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9930 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9933 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9936 \begin_layout Enumerate
9940 arg "depth-decrement"
9943 to decrease the depth after the next
9946 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9953 \begin_layout Enumerate
9955 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9960 \begin_layout Enumerate
9962 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9963 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9967 \begin_layout Enumerate
9968 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9977 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9982 reset the counter for the label.
9986 \begin_layout Enumerate
9990 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9996 arg "depth-decrement"
9999 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10000 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10001 into the twofold-nested
10009 \begin_layout Enumerate
10010 The same thing happens if we do another
10013 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10019 arg "depth-decrement"
10022 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10025 \begin_layout Standard
10026 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10031 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10042 The number of other
10046 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10053 The same rule applies for the
10057 environment, as well.
10060 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10061 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10064 \begin_layout Enumerate
10065 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10066 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10067 the same detail with how we did it.
10076 \begin_layout Standard
10084 arg "depth-increment"
10091 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10092 the example in parentheses someplace.
10093 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10094 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10095 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10099 \begin_layout Enumerate
10104 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10108 \begin_layout Verse
10109 Now we will add verse.
10110 \begin_inset Newline newline
10113 It will get much worse.
10114 \begin_inset Newline newline
10124 arg "depth-increment"
10134 \begin_layout Verse
10135 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10136 \begin_inset Newline newline
10139 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10140 \begin_inset Newline newline
10146 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10154 \begin_layout Verse
10155 Here comes a table:
10159 \begin_layout Standard
10160 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10166 \begin_layout Standard
10168 \begin_inset Tabular
10169 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10170 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10171 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10172 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10257 \begin_layout Verse
10261 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10271 arg "depth-increment"
10277 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10283 \begin_inset Newline newline
10291 arg "depth-decrement"
10298 \begin_layout Enumerate
10303 : level #1) This is another item.
10304 Note that selecting a
10308 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10309 3 times to put the table inside the
10317 \begin_layout Quotation
10318 We're now ending the
10322 list and changing to
10327 We're still at level #1.
10328 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10329 The next set of paragraphs is a
10330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10337 We will nest both the
10344 \begin_inset space ~
10349 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10353 for the letter body.
10357 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10360 to preserve the depth.
10361 Remember that you need to use
10364 arg "newline-insert newline"
10367 to create multiple lines inside the
10374 \begin_inset space ~
10384 \begin_layout Right Address
10386 \begin_inset Newline newline
10389 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10390 \begin_inset Newline newline
10396 \begin_layout Address
10398 \begin_inset space ~
10404 \begin_layout Quotation
10405 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10406 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10409 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10410 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10411 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10412 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10413 as soon as possible.
10414 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10417 \begin_layout Quotation
10418 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10419 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10420 with your order, along with payment.
10423 \begin_layout Quotation
10424 We thank you again for your patience.
10427 \begin_layout Address
10429 \begin_inset Newline newline
10436 \begin_layout Quotation
10437 That ends that example!
10440 \begin_layout Standard
10441 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10442 gives you a lot of power with just
10444 We could have easily nested an
10465 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10468 \begin_layout Subsection
10470 \begin_inset Index idx
10473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10474 Nesting ! Separation
10480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10482 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10489 \begin_layout Standard
10490 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10492 For example you need two different enumerations:
10495 \begin_layout Enumerate
10500 \begin_layout Enumerate
10505 \begin_layout Enumerate
10509 \begin_layout Standard
10510 \begin_inset Separator plain
10516 \begin_layout Itemize
10522 \begin_layout Standard
10523 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10529 \begin_layout Enumerate
10533 \begin_layout Enumerate
10537 \begin_layout Enumerate
10541 \begin_layout Standard
10542 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10543 list item and use the menu
10545 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10546 Separated <Name> Above
10550 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10551 Separated <Name> Below
10554 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10555 ) and before or behind it the
10557 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10560 \begin_layout Standard
10561 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10562 (red arrow in LyX).
10563 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10564 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10567 \begin_layout Standard
10568 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10571 arg "paragraph-break"
10578 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10581 \begin_layout Section
10582 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10583 \begin_inset Index idx
10586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10595 \begin_layout Standard
10596 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10597 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10599 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10600 be broken at the end of a line.
10601 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10605 \begin_layout Subsection
10607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10609 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10614 \begin_inset Index idx
10617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10626 \begin_layout Standard
10627 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10628 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10629 ) not to break the line at
10631 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10634 \begin_layout Quote
10635 Further documentation is given in section
10636 \begin_inset Newline newline
10640 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10642 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10650 \begin_layout Standard
10651 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10666 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10675 A protected space is set with
10677 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10678 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10680 \begin_inset space ~
10688 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10694 \begin_layout Subsection
10696 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10698 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10703 \begin_inset Index idx
10706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10707 Spacing ! Horizontal
10715 \begin_layout Standard
10716 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10718 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10719 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10723 The length units are listed in Appendix
10724 \begin_inset space ~
10728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10730 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10737 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10739 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10741 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10746 \begin_inset Index idx
10749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10750 Spaces ! Inter-word
10758 \begin_layout Standard
10759 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10760 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10761 at the ends of sentences.
10762 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10763 automatically takes care about this.
10764 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10765 followed by a period; see section
10766 \begin_inset space ~
10770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10772 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10777 To insert a normal space, select
10779 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10780 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10782 \begin_inset space ~
10790 arg "space-insert normal"
10796 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10798 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10800 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10805 \begin_inset Index idx
10808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10817 \begin_layout Standard
10819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10826 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10831 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10835 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10836 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10837 inside abbreviations:
10840 \begin_layout Quote
10842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10846 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10849 \begin_layout Standard
10850 or between values and units.
10851 Compare for example this:
10852 \begin_inset Newline newline
10856 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10860 \begin_inset Newline newline
10863 10 kg (normal space
10866 \begin_layout Standard
10867 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10869 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10870 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10872 \begin_inset space ~
10880 arg "space-insert thin"
10886 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10890 \begin_layout Standard
10891 You can also insert the following space types:
10894 \begin_layout Description
10896 \begin_inset space ~
10900 \begin_inset space ~
10903 space A line with a
10904 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10908 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10912 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10915 negative thin space between the arrows.
10918 \begin_layout Description
10920 \begin_inset space ~
10924 \begin_inset space ~
10927 space A line with a
10928 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10932 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10936 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10939 negative medium space between the arrows.
10942 \begin_layout Description
10944 \begin_inset space ~
10948 \begin_inset space ~
10951 space A line with a
10952 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10956 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10960 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10963 negative thick space between the arrows.
10966 \begin_layout Description
10968 \begin_inset space ~
10972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10976 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10980 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10984 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10988 \begin_inset space ~
10992 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10995 em) space between the arrows.
10998 \begin_layout Description
11000 \begin_inset space ~
11004 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11008 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11012 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11016 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11020 \begin_inset space ~
11024 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11027 em) space between the arrows.
11030 \begin_layout Description
11032 \begin_inset space ~
11036 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11040 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11044 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11048 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11052 \begin_inset space ~
11056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11059 em) space between the arrows.
11062 \begin_layout Description
11064 \begin_inset space ~
11068 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11072 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11077 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11081 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11084 cm space between the arrows.
11087 \begin_layout Standard
11089 \begin_inset space ~
11093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11095 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11099 lists the different space sizes.
11102 \begin_layout Standard
11103 \begin_inset Float table
11110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11111 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11114 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11116 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11120 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11130 \begin_inset Tabular
11131 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11132 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11133 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11134 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11198 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11222 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11250 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11278 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11302 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11345 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11373 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11386 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11407 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11409 \begin_inset Index idx
11412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11421 \begin_layout Standard
11422 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11423 feature for adding extra space
11424 in a uniform fashion.
11425 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11426 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11427 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11428 equally between themselves.
11431 \begin_layout Standard
11432 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11435 \begin_layout Quote
11437 This is on the left side
11438 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11441 This is on the right
11444 \begin_layout Quote
11447 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11451 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11457 \begin_layout Quote
11460 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11464 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11468 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11474 \begin_layout Standard
11475 That was an example in the
11481 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11485 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11489 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11492 is one in a standard paragraph.
11493 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11497 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11500 \begin_layout Standard
11501 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11504 \begin_inset space ~
11509 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11512 \begin_layout Standard
11514 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11518 \begin_inset space ~
11524 \begin_layout Standard
11526 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11530 \begin_inset space ~
11536 \begin_layout Standard
11538 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11542 \begin_inset space ~
11548 \begin_layout Standard
11550 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11554 \begin_inset space ~
11560 \begin_layout Standard
11562 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11566 \begin_inset space ~
11572 \begin_layout Standard
11574 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11578 \begin_inset space ~
11584 \begin_layout Standard
11585 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11593 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11597 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11599 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11600 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11604 option in the space dialog.
11612 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11614 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11616 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11621 \begin_inset Index idx
11624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11633 \begin_layout Standard
11634 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11635 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11638 \begin_layout Standard
11639 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11642 What is correct English?:
11643 \begin_inset Newline newline
11647 \begin_inset Newline newline
11651 \begin_inset space ~
11654 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11655 \begin_inset Newline newline
11659 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11670 \begin_inset Newline newline
11674 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11685 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11691 \begin_layout Standard
11693 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11698 \begin_inset space ~
11702 \begin_inset space ~
11706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11710 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11712 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11713 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11717 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11723 \begin_inset space ~
11727 \begin_inset space ~
11731 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11734 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11743 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11744 That is why it is named
11745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11753 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11754 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11758 \begin_layout Subsection
11760 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11762 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11767 \begin_inset Index idx
11770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11779 \begin_layout Standard
11780 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11782 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11783 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11785 \begin_inset space ~
11791 There you find the following sizes:
11794 \begin_layout Standard
11807 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11808 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11813 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11815 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11816 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11818 \begin_inset space ~
11824 \begin_inset Index idx
11827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11828 Document ! Settings
11833 for the paragraph separation.
11834 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11845 \begin_layout Standard
11851 \begin_inset Index idx
11854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11860 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11861 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11866 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11867 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11876 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11885 s are described in section
11886 \begin_inset space ~
11890 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11892 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11901 If there are several
11905 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11906 You can therefore use
11910 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11913 \begin_layout Standard
11918 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11919 \begin_inset space ~
11923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11925 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11932 \begin_layout Standard
11933 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11943 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11944 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11956 \begin_layout Subsection
11957 Paragraph Alignment
11958 \begin_inset Index idx
11961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11962 Paragraph ! Alignment
11970 \begin_layout Standard
11971 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11973 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11976 dialog (toolbar button
11979 arg "layout-paragraph"
11983 There are five possibilities:
11986 \begin_layout Itemize
11994 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12000 \begin_layout Itemize
12008 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12014 \begin_layout Itemize
12022 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12028 \begin_layout Itemize
12036 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12042 \begin_layout Itemize
12050 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12056 \begin_layout Standard
12057 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12058 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12059 the left and right margins.
12060 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12063 \begin_layout Standard
12065 This paragraph is right aligned,
12068 \begin_layout Standard
12070 this one is centered,
12073 \begin_layout Standard
12075 this one is left aligned.
12078 \begin_layout Subsection
12080 \begin_inset Index idx
12083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12084 Page breaks ! Forced
12090 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12092 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12099 \begin_layout Standard
12100 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12101 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12102 force a page break where you want one.
12103 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12104 is good at page breaking.
12105 Only if you use a lot of
12109 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12110 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12113 \begin_layout Standard
12114 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12115 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12119 have to change the page breaking.
12122 \begin_layout Standard
12123 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12125 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12127 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12128 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12130 \begin_inset space ~
12136 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12138 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12139 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12141 \begin_inset space ~
12146 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12148 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12149 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12152 \begin_layout Standard
12153 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12154 at the top of a page.
12155 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12157 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12158 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12159 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12163 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12167 to learn more about
12174 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12176 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12178 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12183 \begin_inset Index idx
12186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12187 Page breaks ! Clear
12195 \begin_layout Standard
12196 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12197 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12198 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12199 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12200 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12203 \begin_layout Standard
12204 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12206 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12207 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12209 \begin_inset space ~
12215 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12217 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12218 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12220 \begin_inset space ~
12224 \begin_inset space ~
12229 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12230 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12233 \begin_layout Subsection
12235 \begin_inset Index idx
12238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12245 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12247 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12254 \begin_layout Standard
12255 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12257 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12259 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12260 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12262 \begin_inset space ~
12266 \begin_inset space ~
12274 arg "newline-insert newline"
12278 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12280 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12281 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12283 \begin_inset space ~
12287 \begin_inset space ~
12295 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12298 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12300 This is useful to avoid
12301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12308 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12311 \begin_layout Standard
12312 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12313 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12315 very good at line breaking.
12316 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12317 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12318 \begin_inset space ~
12322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12324 reference "sec:Quote"
12329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12331 reference "sec:Verse"
12336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12338 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12345 \begin_layout Subsection
12347 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12349 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12354 \begin_inset Index idx
12357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12366 \begin_layout Standard
12368 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12379 \begin_layout Standard
12383 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12384 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12386 \begin_inset space ~
12391 you can insert horizontal lines.
12392 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12393 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12394 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12397 \begin_layout Standard
12399 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12410 \begin_layout Section
12411 Characters and Symbols
12414 \begin_layout Standard
12415 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12416 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12417 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12419 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12425 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12429 for information on how this is done.
12432 \begin_layout Standard
12433 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12438 dialog via the menu
12440 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12441 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12447 \begin_layout Standard
12448 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12456 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12457 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12459 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12467 \begin_layout Section
12468 Fonts and Text Styles
12469 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12471 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12478 \begin_layout Subsection
12480 \begin_inset Index idx
12483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12492 \begin_layout Standard
12493 There are two types of fonts:
12496 \begin_layout Description
12498 \begin_inset space ~
12502 \begin_inset Index idx
12505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12511 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12512 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12516 characters) in the font.
12517 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12518 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12519 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12520 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12521 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12522 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12523 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12524 \begin_inset Newline newline
12527 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12528 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12529 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12530 sizes than at small ones.
12531 \begin_inset Newline newline
12545 \begin_inset space ~
12553 \begin_layout Description
12555 \begin_inset space ~
12559 \begin_inset Index idx
12562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12568 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12569 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12570 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12571 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12572 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12573 image manipulation program.
12574 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12575 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12576 \begin_inset space ~
12579 pixels high up to 34
12580 \begin_inset space ~
12583 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12584 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12585 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12587 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12588 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12589 \begin_inset Newline newline
12592 Bitmap fonts are named
12595 \begin_inset space ~
12600 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12603 \begin_layout Standard
12604 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12605 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12606 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12607 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12608 use scalable fonts.
12611 \begin_layout Standard
12612 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12615 \begin_layout Standard
12616 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12618 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
12620 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757415
12623 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12624 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12625 font to emphasize text, you use an
12626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12634 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12636 In \SpecialChar LyX
12637 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12641 \begin_layout Subsection
12644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12646 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12653 \begin_layout Standard
12654 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12655 used its own fonts.
12656 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12657 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12660 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12661 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12662 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12663 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12664 to a word processor.
12665 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12666 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12667 files are very portable across
12668 different machines.
12669 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12670 has increased a lot
12671 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12674 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12676 \begin_inset space ~
12680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12682 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12687 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12688 code in the document
12689 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12692 \begin_layout Standard
12693 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12694 engines that are also able directly
12695 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12697 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12699 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12701 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12702 that is installed on your system.
12703 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12706 \begin_layout Standard
12707 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12715 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12716 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12724 \begin_layout Subsection
12725 Document Font and Font size
12726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12728 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12733 \begin_inset Index idx
12736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12743 \begin_inset Index idx
12746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12755 \begin_layout Standard
12756 You can set the document fonts in the
12758 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12762 \begin_inset Index idx
12765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12766 Document ! Settings
12776 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12777 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12780 \begin_inset space ~
12789 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12791 \begin_inset space ~
12794 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12797 \begin_layout Standard
12802 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12803 This requires that you use
12815 as the output format, i.
12816 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12820 \begin_inset space \space{}
12823 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12824 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12825 installed (see section
12826 \begin_inset space ~
12830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12832 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12837 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12839 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12840 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12842 \begin_inset space ~
12845 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12846 cannot determine the family.
12847 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12848 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12851 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12854 \begin_layout Standard
12855 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12856 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12861 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12867 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12869 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
12871 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
12874 font encoding, this is
12875 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
12876 , depending on the document language,
12879 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
12880 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12888 \begin_inset space ~
12894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12904 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
12905 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12913 \begin_inset space ~
12919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12927 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
12931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12943 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12948 European Computer Modern
12951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12959 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12962 \begin_layout Standard
12967 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12968 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12973 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12976 \begin_inset space ~
12981 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12987 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12988 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12991 \begin_layout Itemize
12995 \begin_inset space ~
13000 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13013 \begin_inset space ~
13018 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13019 community in order to replace
13023 as the default font.
13024 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13025 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13028 \begin_inset space ~
13041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13042 One difference is improved kerning.
13050 \begin_layout Itemize
13051 If you do not like the look of
13059 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13060 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13064 \begin_inset space ~
13070 \begin_inset space ~
13080 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13081 \begin_inset space ~
13084 serif and typewriter fonts,
13088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13089 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13090 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13096 \begin_inset space ~
13105 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13110 \begin_inset space \space{}
13118 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13122 \begin_inset space \space{}
13128 \begin_inset space ~
13136 \begin_inset space ~
13146 but you can also select your own.
13147 \begin_inset Newline newline
13150 The differences between roman,
13153 \begin_inset space ~
13162 fonts are explained in section
13163 \begin_inset space ~
13167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13169 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13174 \begin_inset Newline newline
13180 \begin_inset space ~
13185 was originally designed for newspapers.
13186 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13187 into the small newspaper columns.
13191 \begin_inset space ~
13196 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13199 \begin_layout Standard
13200 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13213 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13218 depends on the class you are using.
13219 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13222 \begin_layout Standard
13223 Note that the font size is the
13228 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13229 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13230 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13231 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13234 \begin_inset space ~
13240 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13241 \begin_inset space ~
13245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13247 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13254 \begin_layout Standard
13258 \begin_inset space ~
13263 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13265 \begin_inset space ~
13268 serif or typewriter.
13273 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13283 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13286 \begin_layout Standard
13291 LaTeX font encoding
13293 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13294 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13300 \begin_inset Index idx
13303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13311 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13313 \begin_inset space ~
13317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13319 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13326 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13327 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13328 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13332 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13340 \begin_layout Standard
13341 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13343 Use Old Style Figures
13347 Use True Small Caps
13350 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13353 Use Old Style Figures
13355 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13357 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13365 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13369 Use True Small Caps
13371 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13372 of scaled capitals.
13373 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13374 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13377 \begin_layout Standard
13382 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13383 a font to display the script characters.
13387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13388 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13394 \begin_inset Index idx
13397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13404 So this has no effect for the document language
13420 \begin_layout Standard
13423 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13425 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13426 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13432 \begin_inset Index idx
13435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13437 packages ! microtype
13446 \begin_layout Standard
13449 Disallow line breaks after dashes
13451 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
13455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13456 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13457 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13463 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
13464 \begin_inset space ~
13468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13470 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
13480 \begin_layout Standard
13481 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13485 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13493 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13498 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13499 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13501 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13503 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13506 dialog, see section
13507 \begin_inset space ~
13511 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13513 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13525 \begin_layout Subsection
13529 \begin_layout Standard
13530 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13531 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13533 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13534 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13535 choose a math font in the dialog
13537 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13541 \begin_inset Index idx
13544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13545 Document ! Settings
13551 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13552 automatically selects a math font.
13553 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13554 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13563 \begin_inset space ~
13569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13574 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13575 document font is available.
13578 \begin_layout Standard
13579 Note that the math font will not be used for
13583 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13589 or by the insertion of the command
13596 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13597 \begin_inset space ~
13601 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13602 while the math characters do not.
13604 \begin_inset space ~
13607 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13610 \begin_inset space ~
13618 \begin_inset space ~
13623 in the document font settings.
13626 \begin_layout Standard
13627 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13628 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13629 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13630 font (in most cases
13631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13637 \begin_inset space ~
13643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13646 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13647 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13655 \begin_inset space ~
13661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13667 \begin_layout Subsection
13669 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
13671 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
13675 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
13677 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13679 name "subsec:charstyles"
13686 \begin_inset Index idx
13689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13696 \begin_inset Index idx
13699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13708 \begin_layout Standard
13709 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13710 automatically changes the
13711 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
13714 style for certain paragraph environments.
13716 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
13717 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
13719 This is where we meet the concept of
13725 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
13727 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
13731 \begin_layout Standard
13733 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
13738 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
13740 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
13753 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
13759 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13762 e., available with all document classes.
13763 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
13767 for specific purposes.
13768 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
13771 \begin_layout Standard
13773 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
13774 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
13784 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
13788 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
13789 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13801 — you customized the
13806 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
13807 among them, encourage the use of
13819 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
13820 \begin_inset space ~
13824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13826 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13831 Rather than fiddling with
13835 , they encourage the use of
13839 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
13840 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13844 \begin_inset Quotes els
13848 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13851 ), not their form (
13852 \begin_inset Quotes els
13856 \begin_inset Quotes ers
13860 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
13861 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
13862 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
13863 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
13864 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
13865 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
13871 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
13872 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13875 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
13876 With a semantic markup (such as
13880 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
13885 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13887 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
13888 of a document, using different markup semantics.
13891 \begin_layout Standard
13893 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
13894 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
13895 by \SpecialChar LyX
13901 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13903 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
13904 Builtin Text Styles
13905 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13907 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
13914 \begin_layout Standard
13916 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
13917 The two builtin text styles can be
13918 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
13922 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
13926 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
13927 both of these styles
13930 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
13938 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
13944 \begin_layout Standard
13949 style, do one of the following:
13952 \begin_layout Itemize
13953 click on the toolbar button
13962 \begin_layout Itemize
13963 use the key binding
13970 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
13974 \begin_layout Itemize
13976 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
13984 arg "dialog-show character"
13990 arg "dialog-show character"
13993 ) as described in section
13994 \begin_inset space ~
13998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14000 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14009 \begin_layout Standard
14010 These commands are all toggles.
14015 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14018 \begin_layout Standard
14019 One typically uses the
14023 style for proper names.
14025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14032 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14034 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14038 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14042 \begin_layout Standard
14044 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14049 is producing text in
14053 , but the definition can be changed.
14058 \begin_layout Standard
14060 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14062 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14070 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14077 \begin_layout Itemize
14078 clicking on the toolbar button
14087 \begin_layout Itemize
14088 using the keybindings
14095 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14099 \begin_layout Itemize
14101 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14109 arg "dialog-show character"
14115 arg "dialog-show character"
14118 ) as described in section
14119 \begin_inset space ~
14123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14125 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14134 \begin_layout Standard
14139 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14141 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14143 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14146 packages use a different font
14147 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14148 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14154 \begin_layout Standard
14155 We've been using the
14159 style all over the place in this document.
14160 Here's one more example:
14163 \begin_layout Quotation
14167 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14169 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14175 \begin_layout Standard
14176 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14177 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14178 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14179 the common tendency to overuse
14180 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14182 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14187 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14191 \begin_layout Standard
14193 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14194 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14195 only as font changes and integrated in the
14203 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14206 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14213 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14215 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14219 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14222 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14224 \begin_inset space ~
14227 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14229 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14235 arg "dialog-show character"
14241 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14243 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14249 arg "dialog-show character"
14253 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14257 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14259 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14261 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14263 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14270 \begin_layout Standard
14272 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14273 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14275 \begin_inset space ~
14279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14281 reference "subsec:Modules"
14288 ), or local layout settings (see section
14289 \begin_inset space ~
14293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14295 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14300 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14304 markup for specific functions.
14305 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14310 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14320 \begin_inset Quotes els
14324 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14330 \begin_layout Standard
14332 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14333 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14335 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14341 \begin_layout Standard
14343 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14344 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14349 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14350 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14351 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14356 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14357 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14362 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14370 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14371 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14372 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14373 \begin_inset Flex Code
14376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14378 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14387 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14392 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14401 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14406 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14415 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14416 on screen their formal appearance.
14421 \begin_layout Subsection
14423 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
14425 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
14429 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
14435 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
14437 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
14443 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
14445 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
14449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14451 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14456 \begin_inset Index idx
14459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14468 \begin_layout Standard
14469 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
14470 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
14473 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
14475 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
14477 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
14481 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
14482 the properties of text passages
14483 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
14487 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
14488 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
14489 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
14490 from ordinary dialog.
14491 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
14495 \begin_layout Standard
14497 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
14498 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
14499 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
14500 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
14501 the properties of the respective text passages.
14506 comes in as a last resort.
14511 \begin_layout Standard
14512 Before we document how to
14513 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
14514 use custom character style
14515 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
14516 tweak the text properties
14518 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
14519 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
14521 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
14525 \begin_inset Newline newline
14528 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
14529 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
14532 \begin_layout Standard
14534 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
14535 use custom character styles
14536 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
14537 tweak text properties
14540 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
14543 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14545 \begin_inset space ~
14548 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14550 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
14556 arg "dialog-show character"
14561 dialog or press the toolbar button
14564 arg "dialog-show character"
14569 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
14572 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
14573 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
14575 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
14578 property that you can choose.
14579 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
14582 \begin_inset space ~
14587 , which keeps the current state of that property.
14589 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
14593 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
14595 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
14600 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
14601 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
14602 environments all at once.
14605 \begin_layout Standard
14607 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
14609 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
14612 properties, and their options (in addition to
14615 \begin_inset space ~
14621 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
14625 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
14633 \begin_layout Labeling
14634 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14648 The possible options are:
14652 \begin_layout Labeling
14653 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14658 This is the Roman font family.
14659 Normally a serif font.
14660 It's also the default family.
14670 \begin_layout Labeling
14671 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14675 \begin_inset space ~
14682 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14694 \begin_layout Labeling
14695 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14702 This is the Typewriter font family.
14708 arg "font-typewriter"
14714 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
14718 \begin_layout Standard
14720 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
14721 The general differences of these families are:
14724 \begin_layout Itemize
14726 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
14731 fonts use characters with serifs.
14732 These are the small
14733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14740 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14741 The following example shows the difference:
14742 \begin_inset Newline newline
14746 \begin_inset Newline newline
14751 text without serifs
14754 \begin_inset Newline newline
14757 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14758 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14765 \begin_layout Itemize
14767 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14772 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14773 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14774 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14777 \begin_layout Itemize
14779 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14792 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14797 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14810 \begin_inset Newline newline
14814 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14819 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14830 \begin_inset Note Note
14833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14835 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
14836 For more on phantoms see section
14837 \begin_inset space ~
14841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14843 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14853 \begin_inset Newline newline
14862 \begin_layout Labeling
14863 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14868 This corresponds to the print weight.
14873 \begin_layout Labeling
14874 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14879 This is the Medium font series.
14880 It's also the default series.
14883 \begin_layout Labeling
14884 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14891 This is the Bold font series.
14904 \begin_layout Labeling
14905 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14910 As the name implies.
14915 \begin_layout Labeling
14916 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14921 This is the Upright font shape.
14922 It's also the default shape.
14925 \begin_layout Labeling
14926 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14936 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
14941 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
14946 s the Italic font shape
14952 \begin_layout Labeling
14953 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14960 This is the Slanted font shape
14962 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14963 , this is different from italic).
14966 \begin_layout Labeling
14967 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14971 \begin_inset space ~
14978 This is the Small caps font shape
14985 \begin_layout Labeling
14986 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14991 Alters the text color.
14992 Note that not all DVI
14993 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
14995 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
14998 viewers are able to display colors.
15000 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15004 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15006 \begin_inset space ~
15013 , which means that the document default color set in
15015 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15016 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15022 \begin_inset space ~
15028 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15030 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15034 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15114 \begin_inset Index idx
15117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15126 \begin_layout Labeling
15127 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15132 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15133 the language of the document.
15134 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15135 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15136 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15139 in blue to indicate the change
15140 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15141 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15145 \begin_inset Newline newline
15148 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15150 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15151 When using the spell checking (see section
15152 \begin_inset space ~
15156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15158 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15162 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15163 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15165 \begin_inset Newline newline
15168 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15170 Exclude from Spellchecking
15173 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15176 \begin_layout Labeling
15177 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15182 Alters the size of the font.
15184 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15186 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15190 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15193 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15194 document font size.
15195 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15196 the details, but a general description of what
15202 \begin_layout Labeling
15203 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15224 arg "font-size tiny"
15230 \begin_layout Labeling
15231 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15252 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15258 \begin_layout Labeling
15259 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15280 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15286 \begin_layout Labeling
15287 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15299 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15308 arg "font-size small"
15314 \begin_layout Labeling
15315 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15329 It's also the default size.
15333 arg "font-size normal"
15339 \begin_layout Labeling
15340 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15361 arg "font-size large"
15367 \begin_layout Labeling
15368 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15389 arg "font-size larger"
15395 \begin_layout Labeling
15396 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15417 arg "font-size largest"
15423 \begin_layout Labeling
15424 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15445 arg "font-size huge"
15451 \begin_layout Labeling
15452 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15473 arg "font-size giant"
15479 \begin_layout Labeling
15480 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15485 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
15486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15505 arg "font-size increase"
15511 \begin_layout Labeling
15512 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15517 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
15518 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15522 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15537 arg "font-size decrease"
15544 \begin_layout Standard
15549 : don't go crazy with this feature.
15550 You should almost never need to change the font size.
15552 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
15553 — use those instead.
15554 This is here for fine-tuning only!
15557 \begin_layout Labeling
15558 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15560 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
15564 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
15570 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
15571 change a few other things at the character level
15572 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
15573 have text passages being underlined
15577 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
15578 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
15579 days, when you could not change fonts.
15580 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15581 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15582 because some people
15586 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15593 \begin_layout Labeling
15594 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15596 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
15603 This is text with emphasize on
15606 This might seem like the same as
15610 , but it is actually a bit different.
15616 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
15618 Normally this font is equal to italic.
15619 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
15623 \begin_layout Labeling
15624 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15626 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
15631 Don't use underlining.
15636 \begin_layout Labeling
15637 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15639 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
15643 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
15651 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
15653 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
15662 arg "font-underline"
15668 \begin_inset Newline newline
15672 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
15675 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
15676 when you could not change fonts.
15677 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
15678 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
15679 because some people
15683 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
15688 \begin_layout Labeling
15689 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15693 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
15695 \begin_inset space ~
15704 This is text with Double under
15705 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
15707 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
15716 arg "font-underunderline"
15720 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
15722 \begin_inset Newline newline
15725 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
15726 about double underbar
15731 \begin_layout Labeling
15732 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15736 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
15738 \begin_inset space ~
15747 This is text with Wavy under
15748 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
15750 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
15759 arg "font-underwave"
15763 \begin_inset Newline newline
15766 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
15767 Keep antinausea pills handy.
15768 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
15773 \begin_layout Labeling
15774 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15776 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
15781 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
15787 \begin_layout Labeling
15788 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15790 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
15795 Don't use strikethrough.
15798 \begin_layout Labeling
15799 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15803 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
15805 \begin_inset space ~
15809 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
15817 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
15819 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
15820 Single strikethrough
15828 arg "font-strikeout"
15832 \begin_inset Newline newline
15835 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
15836 changed in the meantime.
15839 \begin_layout Labeling
15840 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15842 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
15846 \begin_inset space ~
15850 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
15852 \begin_inset space ~
15856 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
15864 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
15866 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
15872 \begin_inset Newline newline
15875 This is used to make text hardly readable.
15879 \begin_layout Standard
15881 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
15882 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
15883 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
15884 \begin_inset space ~
15888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15890 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
15897 \begin_layout Itemize
15899 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
15906 This is text with emphasize on
15911 \begin_layout Itemize
15915 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
15922 This is text with Noun on.
15924 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
15931 , this is a logical attribute.
15932 Normally it's equivalent to
15935 \begin_inset space ~
15945 \begin_layout Standard
15946 So you have a huge number of combinations to
15947 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
15949 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
15954 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
15955 chosen a new character style
15956 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
15957 applied a text property
15960 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
15963 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15965 \begin_inset space ~
15968 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15970 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
15976 arg "dialog-show character"
15984 arg "dialog-show character"
15987 ) dialog, the settings are
15988 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
15992 You can activate the
15993 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
15995 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
15996 last applied properties
15998 by using the toolbar button
16001 arg "textstyle-apply"
16005 The button lets you apply
16006 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16007 your custom character style
16008 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16011 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16013 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16014 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16015 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16016 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16021 \begin_layout Standard
16022 To completely reset the
16023 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16025 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16026 text properties of a selection
16028 to the default, use
16029 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16031 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16041 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16046 from the menu of the toolbar button
16049 arg "textstyle-apply"
16056 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16057 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16058 you just set the shape to
16059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16077 \begin_inset space ~
16091 \begin_layout Standard
16093 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16094 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16102 \begin_inset space ~
16114 \begin_layout Itemize
16116 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16129 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16147 \begin_inset Newline newline
16151 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16165 \begin_inset Note Note
16168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16169 For more on phantoms see section
16170 \begin_inset space ~
16174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16176 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16186 \begin_inset Newline newline
16192 \begin_layout Itemize
16194 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16199 fonts use characters with serifs.
16200 These are the small
16201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16208 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16209 The following example shows the difference:
16210 \begin_inset Newline newline
16214 \begin_inset Newline newline
16219 text without serifs
16222 \begin_inset Newline newline
16225 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16226 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16233 \begin_layout Itemize
16235 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16240 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16241 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16242 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16247 \begin_layout Standard
16249 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16257 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16258 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16261 \begin_inset space ~
16266 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16267 the property to be removed.
16268 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16269 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16270 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16288 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16289 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16297 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16301 \begin_inset space ~
16306 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16317 If you, for example, set
16318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16336 \begin_inset space ~
16341 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16350 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16355 \begin_layout Standard
16357 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16360 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16361 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16364 \begin_layout Section
16365 Printing and Previewing
16368 \begin_layout Subsection
16372 \begin_layout Standard
16373 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16374 using \SpecialChar LyX
16375 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16376 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16377 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16378 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16380 Additional Features
16385 \begin_layout Standard
16387 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16390 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16391 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16392 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16395 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16396 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16397 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16398 to turn your writing into printable output.
16399 This happens in two stages:
16402 \begin_layout Enumerate
16403 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16404 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16406 a file with the extension,
16407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16421 \begin_layout Enumerate
16422 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
16423 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16424 to use the commands in the
16428 file to produce printable output.
16431 \begin_layout Subsection
16432 Output file formats
16433 \begin_inset Index idx
16436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16443 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16445 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16452 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16453 Simple text (ASCII)
16454 \begin_inset Index idx
16457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16458 File formats ! ASCII
16466 \begin_layout Standard
16467 This file type has the extension
16468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16480 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16484 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16491 \begin_layout Standard
16492 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16494 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16495 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16497 \begin_inset space ~
16503 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
16504 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16505 bibliography (section
16506 \begin_inset space ~
16510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16512 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16517 If your document includes such material, use
16519 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16520 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16522 \begin_inset space ~
16526 \begin_inset space ~
16530 \begin_inset space ~
16538 \begin_inset space ~
16542 \begin_inset space ~
16548 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
16549 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16552 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16555 \begin_inset Index idx
16558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16559 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
16568 \begin_layout Standard
16569 This file type has the extension
16570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16581 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16584 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16585 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16586 -Errors or to process it manually
16587 with console commands.
16588 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16589 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16590 's temporary directory whenever you
16591 view or export your document.
16594 \begin_layout Standard
16595 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16596 -file using the menu
16598 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16599 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16603 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16604 export variants are explained in section
16605 \begin_inset space ~
16609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16611 reference "subsec:Export"
16618 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16620 \begin_inset Index idx
16623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16632 \begin_layout Standard
16633 This file type has the extension
16634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16651 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16654 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
16655 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16656 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16660 \begin_layout Standard
16661 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
16662 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16663 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
16664 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
16665 when you view the DVI.
16666 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16669 \begin_layout Standard
16670 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
16672 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16673 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16678 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16679 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16681 \begin_inset space ~
16687 The latter option uses the program
16689 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16695 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16698 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
16699 font access (see section
16700 \begin_inset space ~
16704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16706 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
16711 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
16712 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
16717 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16719 \begin_inset Index idx
16722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16723 File formats ! PostScript
16731 \begin_layout Standard
16732 This file type has the extension
16733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16745 PostScript was developed by the company
16749 as a printer language.
16750 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
16752 PostScript can be seen as a
16753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16756 programming language
16757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16760 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
16764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16765 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16772 \begin_inset Index idx
16775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16777 packages ! pstricks
16787 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
16790 \begin_layout Standard
16791 PostScript can only contain images in the format
16792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16795 Encapsulated PostScript
16796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16799 (EPS, file extension
16800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16812 As \SpecialChar LyX
16813 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
16814 convert them in the background to EPS.
16815 If, for example, you have 50
16816 \begin_inset space ~
16819 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
16821 \begin_inset space ~
16824 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
16825 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
16827 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
16828 EPS to avoid this problem.
16831 \begin_layout Standard
16832 You can export to PostScript using the menu
16834 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16835 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16841 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16843 \begin_inset Index idx
16846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16853 \begin_inset Index idx
16856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16865 \begin_layout Standard
16866 This file type has the extension
16867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16883 Portable Document Format
16884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16891 was derived from PostScript.
16892 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
16894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16901 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
16902 looks exactly the same.
16905 \begin_layout Standard
16906 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
16907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16910 Joint Photographic Experts Group
16911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16914 (JPG, file extension
16915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16927 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16942 Portable Network Graphics
16943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16946 (PNG, file extension
16947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16959 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
16960 converts them in the
16961 background to one of these formats.
16962 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
16963 will slow down your workflow.
16964 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
16967 \begin_layout Standard
16968 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
16970 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16976 \begin_layout Description
16978 \begin_inset space ~
16981 (pdflatex) This uses the program
16985 which converts your file directly to PDF.
16988 \begin_layout Description
16990 \begin_inset space ~
16997 ) This uses the program
16999 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17002 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17005 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17008 is a new engine, derived from
17012 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17013 access (see section
17014 \begin_inset space ~
17018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17020 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17025 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17026 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17031 \begin_layout Description
17033 \begin_inset space ~
17040 ) This uses the program
17045 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17051 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17052 font access (see section
17053 \begin_inset space ~
17057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17059 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17064 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17065 vertically written Japanese.
17068 \begin_layout Description
17070 \begin_inset space ~
17073 (cropped) This is the same as
17076 \begin_inset space ~
17081 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17082 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17083 to generate good-looking
17084 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17087 \begin_layout Description
17089 \begin_inset space ~
17092 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17096 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17100 \begin_layout Description
17102 \begin_inset space ~
17105 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17109 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17110 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17114 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17115 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17118 \begin_layout Standard
17122 \begin_inset space ~
17131 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17132 works without problems.
17133 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17134 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17138 \begin_inset space ~
17146 \begin_inset space ~
17151 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17159 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17161 \begin_inset Index idx
17164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17165 FileFormats ! XHTML
17171 \begin_inset Index idx
17174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17183 \begin_layout Standard
17184 This file type has the extension
17185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17197 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17198 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17199 When \SpecialChar LyX
17200 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17201 suitable for the purpose.
17202 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17204 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17205 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17208 between different formats, which are described in section
17210 Math Output in XHTML
17215 \begin_inset space ~
17223 \begin_layout Standard
17224 XHTML output remains
17225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17232 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17233 features are supported yet.
17237 and the World Wide Web
17241 Additional Features
17243 manual, for more information.
17246 \begin_layout Standard
17247 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17249 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17250 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17256 \begin_layout Subsection
17258 \begin_inset Index idx
17261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17270 \begin_layout Standard
17271 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17272 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17281 or use the toolbar button
17288 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17289 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17290 \begin_inset space ~
17294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17296 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17300 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17302 \begin_inset space ~
17306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17308 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17313 Further output formats can be selected via
17315 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17316 View (Other Formats)
17318 or the toolbar button
17327 \begin_layout Standard
17328 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17329 viewer window using the menu
17331 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17336 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17337 Update (Other Formats)
17342 \begin_layout Standard
17343 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17346 To have a real output, export your document.
17349 \begin_layout Section
17350 A few Words about Typography
17351 \begin_inset Index idx
17354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17363 \begin_layout Subsection
17364 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17365 \begin_inset Index idx
17368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17375 \begin_inset Index idx
17378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17387 \begin_layout Standard
17388 In \SpecialChar LyX
17390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17401 symbol comes in four variants: the
17418 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17424 \begin_layout Standard
17425 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17435 height_special "totalheight"
17440 backgroundcolor "none"
17443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17444 \begin_inset Tabular
17445 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17446 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17447 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17448 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17449 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17450 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17451 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17479 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17480 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17519 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17520 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17542 system key combination
17546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17547 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
17550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17559 and the em dash with
17562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17575 is the Mac label for the right
17586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17599 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17600 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17622 system key combination or
17623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17637 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17650 \begin_inset Formula $-$
17658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17689 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17695 \begin_layout Standard
17696 Dashes can also be inserted with
17698 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17700 \begin_inset space ~
17703 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
17711 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
17712 and 2014 for the en dash).
17715 \begin_layout Standard
17716 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
17717 mode and has a length of its own.
17718 Here are some examples:
17721 \begin_layout Enumerate
17722 line- and page-breaks
17723 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17733 \begin_layout Enumerate
17735 \begin_inset space ~
17739 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17749 \begin_layout Enumerate
17750 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
17751 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17761 \begin_layout Enumerate
17762 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
17766 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
17776 \begin_layout Standard
17778 \begin_inset CommandInset href
17780 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
17781 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
17789 \begin_layout Subsection
17790 Dashes and Line Breaks
17791 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17793 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
17800 \begin_layout Standard
17801 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
17802 case and locale, e.
17803 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17809 \begin_layout Itemize
17810 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
17811 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
17814 \begin_layout Itemize
17815 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
17819 \begin_layout Itemize
17820 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
17821 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
17824 \begin_layout Standard
17825 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
17826 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17837 allows line breaks after hyphens, en-dashes and em-dashes.
17840 \begin_layout Enumerate
17841 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
17842 \begin_inset space ~
17845 – common in British English and generally recommended by
17847 The Elements of Typographic Style
17850 \begin_inset space ~
17853 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
17856 \begin_layout Enumerate
17857 Unwanted line breaks after dashes can be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
17861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17864 Prevent Hyphenation
17869 \begin_inset space ~
17885 in \SpecialChar TeX
17891 \begin_layout Itemize
17893 \begin_inset space ~
17897 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17907 height_special "totalheight"
17912 backgroundcolor "none"
17915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17924 \begin_layout Itemize
17928 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17938 height_special "totalheight"
17943 backgroundcolor "none"
17946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17950 \begin_inset space ~
17958 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
17959 \begin_inset space ~
17962 – sont très utiles.
17965 \begin_layout Itemize
17972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17981 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
17985 \begin_layout Standard
17986 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
17987 \begin_inset space ~
17990 – in contrast to an overfull line
17991 \begin_inset space ~
17994 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17998 \begin_layout Standard
17999 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18002 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18003 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18004 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18005 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18010 \begin_layout Enumerate
18011 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18012 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18013 or \SpecialChar TeX
18019 \begin_layout Itemize
18023 \begin_inset space ~
18026 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18027 \begin_inset space ~
18030 – sont très utiles.
18034 \begin_layout Enumerate
18035 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18036 \begin_inset Newline newline
18041 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18042 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18043 Optional line break
18049 \begin_layout Itemize
18050 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18051 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18052 should be followed by
18053 a line break opportunity.
18056 \begin_layout Standard
18057 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18058 \begin_inset space ~
18062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18064 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18075 \begin_layout Enumerate
18076 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18077 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18078 or en dashes (see section
18079 \begin_inset space ~
18083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18085 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18095 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18096 Changes and backwards compatibility
18099 \begin_layout Standard
18100 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18102 \begin_inset space ~
18105 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18106 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18115 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18116 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18124 \begin_layout Standard
18125 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18127 \begin_inset space ~
18130 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18132 prevents ligation to dashes.
18134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18141 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18146 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18147 after the input (unless the current text font is
18155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18156 The behavior was changed since
18157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18161 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18169 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18172 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18173 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18174 as non-breakable dashes.
18175 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18184 \begin_layout Standard
18187 \begin_inset space ~
18195 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18197 \begin_inset space ~
18200 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18203 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18204 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18205 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18206 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18208 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18212 If you used both literal and
18213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18220 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18222 \begin_inset space ~
18225 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18226 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18229 \begin_layout Subsection
18231 \begin_inset Index idx
18234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18243 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18250 \begin_layout Standard
18251 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18252 but automatically in the output.
18253 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18259 \begin_inset Index idx
18262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18269 following the rules of the document language.
18271 does not hyphenate text in the
18275 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18278 \begin_layout Standard
18280 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18284 font and with unusual constructs, like
18285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18293 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18294 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18295 This is done with the menu
18297 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18298 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18300 \begin_inset space ~
18306 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18308 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18312 \begin_layout Standard
18313 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18314 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18325 would then see the hyphen
18326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18333 as a line break possibility.
18334 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18335 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
18338 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18339 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18342 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
18344 Prevent Hyphenation
18349 \begin_inset space ~
18357 \begin_layout Subsection
18359 \begin_inset Index idx
18362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18371 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18372 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
18373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18375 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18382 \begin_layout Standard
18383 When \SpecialChar LyX
18384 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18385 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18387 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
18390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18393 appropriate amount of space.
18394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18397 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
18399 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
18400 gets after another word.
18403 \begin_layout Standard
18404 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
18405 not work in all cases.
18407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18418 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
18419 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
18422 \begin_layout Standard
18423 Here are some examples of
18427 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18430 \begin_layout Itemize
18435 \begin_layout Itemize
18440 \begin_layout Standard
18441 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18444 \begin_layout Itemize
18446 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18450 this is too much space!
18453 \begin_layout Itemize
18458 \begin_layout Standard
18459 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18462 \begin_layout Standard
18463 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
18466 \begin_layout Enumerate
18470 \begin_inset space ~
18475 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
18476 \begin_inset space ~
18480 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18482 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
18487 \begin_inset Index idx
18490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18491 Spaces ! inter-word
18499 \begin_layout Enumerate
18503 \begin_inset space ~
18508 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
18509 \begin_inset space ~
18513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18515 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
18520 \begin_inset Index idx
18523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18532 \begin_layout Enumerate
18536 \begin_inset space ~
18540 \begin_inset space ~
18544 \begin_inset space ~
18551 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18553 \begin_inset space ~
18558 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
18559 This function is also bound to
18562 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
18568 \begin_layout Standard
18569 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
18572 \begin_layout Itemize
18574 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18578 \begin_inset space \space{}
18581 this is too much space!
18584 \begin_layout Itemize
18585 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
18589 \begin_layout Standard
18590 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
18591 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
18593 will take care of this.
18596 \begin_layout Standard
18597 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
18601 \begin_inset space ~
18607 feature described in the section
18609 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
18614 Additional Features
18619 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18621 \begin_inset Index idx
18624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18625 Typography ! Quotation marks
18631 \begin_inset Index idx
18634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18635 Quotation marks | see
18639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18665 \begin_layout Standard
18667 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
18668 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
18669 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
18671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18679 The keyboard character,
18683 , generates this automatically.
18686 \begin_layout Standard
18687 You can specify what character the
18691 key produces by using the submenu
18697 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18701 \begin_inset Index idx
18704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18705 Document ! Settings
18710 dialog and switching the
18714 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
18715 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
18717 \begin_inset space ~
18723 \begin_layout Labeling
18724 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18736 \begin_inset space ~
18740 \begin_inset space ~
18744 \begin_inset Quotes els
18748 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18762 \begin_inset Quotes els
18766 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18769 quotation marks (as common, e.
18770 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18776 \begin_layout Labeling
18777 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18780 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18784 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18788 \begin_inset space ~
18792 \begin_inset space ~
18796 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18800 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18806 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18810 \begin_inset Quotes sld
18814 \begin_inset Quotes sls
18818 \begin_inset Quotes srs
18821 quotation marks (as common, e.
18822 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18828 \begin_layout Labeling
18829 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18832 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18836 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18840 \begin_inset space ~
18844 \begin_inset space ~
18848 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18852 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18858 \begin_inset Quotes gld
18862 \begin_inset Quotes grd
18866 \begin_inset Quotes gls
18870 \begin_inset Quotes grs
18873 quotation marks (as common, e.
18874 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18880 \begin_layout Labeling
18881 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18884 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18888 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18892 \begin_inset space ~
18896 \begin_inset space ~
18900 \begin_inset Quotes pls
18904 \begin_inset Quotes prs
18910 \begin_inset Quotes pld
18914 \begin_inset Quotes prd
18918 \begin_inset Quotes pls
18922 \begin_inset Quotes prs
18925 quotation marks (as common, e.
18926 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18932 \begin_layout Labeling
18933 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18936 \begin_inset Quotes cld
18940 \begin_inset Quotes crd
18944 \begin_inset space ~
18948 \begin_inset space ~
18952 \begin_inset Quotes cls
18956 \begin_inset Quotes crs
18962 \begin_inset Quotes cld
18966 \begin_inset Quotes crd
18970 \begin_inset Quotes cls
18974 \begin_inset Quotes crs
18977 quotation marks (as common, e.
18978 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18981 g., in Switzerland)
18984 \begin_layout Labeling
18985 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18988 \begin_inset Quotes ald
18992 \begin_inset Quotes ard
18996 \begin_inset space ~
19000 \begin_inset space ~
19004 \begin_inset Quotes als
19008 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19014 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19018 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19022 \begin_inset Quotes als
19026 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19029 quotation marks (as common, e.
19030 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19036 \begin_layout Labeling
19037 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19040 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19044 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19048 \begin_inset space ~
19052 \begin_inset space ~
19056 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19060 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19066 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19070 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19074 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19078 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19081 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19084 \begin_layout Labeling
19085 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19088 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19092 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19096 \begin_inset space ~
19100 \begin_inset space ~
19104 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19108 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19114 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19118 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19122 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19126 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19129 quotation marks (as common, e.
19130 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19133 g., in Great Britain)
19136 \begin_layout Labeling
19137 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19140 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19144 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19148 \begin_inset space ~
19152 \begin_inset space ~
19156 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19160 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19166 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19170 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19174 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19178 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19181 quotation marks (as common, e.
19182 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19188 \begin_layout Labeling
19189 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19192 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19196 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19200 \begin_inset space ~
19204 \begin_inset space ~
19208 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19212 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19218 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19222 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19226 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19230 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19233 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19238 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19239 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19240 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19241 the inner marks differ).
19249 \begin_layout Labeling
19250 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19253 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19257 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19261 \begin_inset space ~
19265 \begin_inset space ~
19269 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19273 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19279 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19283 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19287 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19291 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19294 quotation marks (as common, e.
19295 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19301 \begin_layout Labeling
19302 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19305 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19309 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19313 \begin_inset space ~
19317 \begin_inset space ~
19321 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19325 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19331 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19335 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19339 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19343 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19346 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19349 \begin_layout Labeling
19350 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19351 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19359 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19365 \begin_inset space ~
19369 \begin_inset space ~
19375 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19383 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19387 \begin_inset Quotes jld
19391 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
19395 \begin_inset Quotes jls
19399 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
19402 quotation marks (as common, e.
19403 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19411 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19412 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19420 \begin_layout Labeling
19421 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19422 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19430 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19436 \begin_inset space ~
19440 \begin_inset space ~
19446 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19454 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19458 \begin_inset Quotes kld
19462 \begin_inset Quotes krd
19466 \begin_inset Quotes kls
19470 \begin_inset Quotes krs
19473 quotation marks (as common, e.
19474 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19477 g., in North Korea and China)
19481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19482 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
19483 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
19491 \begin_layout Standard
19492 Inner quotation marks
19496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19497 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
19498 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
19499 case (and specifically the British style shows that
19500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19507 does not necessarily mean
19508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19516 This is why we call them
19517 \begin_inset Quotes els
19521 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19537 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
19539 \begin_inset Quotes els
19543 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19546 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
19549 arg "quote-insert inner"
19554 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19560 \begin_layout Standard
19561 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
19562 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
19563 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
19564 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
19565 If you check the setting
19567 Use dynamic quotation marks
19571 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19572 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19575 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
19576 they appear in a special color).
19577 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
19578 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
19580 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19583 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
19586 \begin_layout Standard
19587 Individual quotation marks (i.
19588 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19591 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
19592 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
19596 \begin_layout Subsection
19598 \begin_inset Index idx
19601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19602 Typography ! Ligatures
19608 \begin_inset Index idx
19611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19642 name "subsec:Ligatures"
19649 \begin_layout Standard
19650 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
19651 print them as single characters.
19652 These groups are known as
19657 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
19658 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
19660 Here are the standard ligatures:
19663 \begin_layout Itemize
19667 \begin_layout Itemize
19671 \begin_layout Itemize
19675 \begin_layout Itemize
19679 \begin_layout Itemize
19683 \begin_layout Standard
19684 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
19687 \begin_layout Standard
19688 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
19689 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
19690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19697 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
19698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19713 To break a ligature, use
19715 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19716 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19718 \begin_inset space ~
19725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19736 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19753 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
19755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19761 \begin_layout Subsection
19763 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
19765 \begin_inset Index idx
19768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19778 \begin_layout Standard
19781 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19782 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
19786 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
19789 \begin_layout Description
19791 The name of the game.
19794 \begin_layout Description
19796 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
19800 \begin_layout Description
19802 The \SpecialChar TeX
19803 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
19807 \begin_layout Description
19808 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
19809 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
19813 \begin_layout Standard
19814 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19820 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
19824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19828 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
19829 world to give programs geek version numbers.
19830 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
19831 converges to the number
19832 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
19835 : The actual version is
19836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19844 , the previous one was
19845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19856 \begin_layout Subsection
19858 \begin_inset Index idx
19861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19870 \begin_layout Standard
19871 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
19872 space between two words.
19873 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
19876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19883 for units use the menu
19885 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19886 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19888 \begin_inset space ~
19896 arg "space-insert thin"
19902 \begin_layout Standard
19903 Here is an example to show the differences:
19906 \begin_layout Standard
19907 \begin_inset Tabular
19908 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
19909 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19910 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19911 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
19913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19918 \begin_inset space ~
19922 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
19930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19934 space between number and unit
19941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19946 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19950 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
19958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
19961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19962 half space between number and unit
19975 \begin_layout Subsection
19977 \begin_inset Index idx
19980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19981 Typography ! Widows and orphans
19989 \begin_layout Standard
19990 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
19992 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
19993 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
19994 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
19995 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
19996 These bits of text became known as
20007 \begin_layout Standard
20008 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20009 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20010 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20011 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20012 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20013 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20014 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20015 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20016 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20017 \begin_inset Newline newline
20025 \begin_inset Newline newline
20033 \begin_inset Newline newline
20036 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20037 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20038 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20040 \begin_inset space ~
20044 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20046 key "latexcompanion"
20052 \begin_inset space ~
20056 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20063 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20064 's page break mechanism.
20067 \begin_layout Chapter
20068 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20069 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20071 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20078 \begin_layout Standard
20079 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20082 \begin_inset space ~
20088 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20091 \begin_layout Section
20093 \begin_inset Index idx
20096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20112 \begin_layout Standard
20114 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20117 \begin_layout Description
20120 \begin_inset space ~
20123 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20124 \begin_inset Newline newline
20128 \begin_inset Note Note
20131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20132 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20140 \begin_layout Description
20141 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20142 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20143 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20146 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20147 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20149 \begin_inset space ~
20155 \begin_inset Newline newline
20159 \begin_inset Note Comment
20162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20163 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20172 \begin_layout Description
20174 \begin_inset space ~
20177 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20178 set in the document settings under
20180 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20182 \begin_inset space ~
20188 \begin_inset Newline newline
20192 \begin_inset Newline newline
20196 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20205 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20206 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20211 of a comment that appears in the output.
20217 \begin_inset Newline newline
20221 \begin_inset Newline newline
20224 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20227 \begin_layout Standard
20228 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20236 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20240 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20243 \begin_layout Section
20245 \begin_inset Index idx
20248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20255 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20257 name "sec:Footnotes"
20264 \begin_layout Standard
20266 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20269 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20272 or the toolbar button
20275 arg "footnote-insert"
20287 \begin_inset Graphics
20288 filename clipart/footnote.png
20297 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20298 's representation of your footnote.
20308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20327 label, the box will
20331 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20332 Clicking on the box label again will close
20345 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
20346 and click on the footnote
20361 \begin_layout Standard
20362 Here is an example footnote:
20370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20371 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
20379 \begin_layout Standard
20380 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
20381 position where the footnote box is placed.
20382 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20383 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20384 according to the document class.
20386 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
20387 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20393 ey are described in the
20396 \begin_inset space ~
20404 \begin_layout Section
20406 \begin_inset Index idx
20409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20416 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20418 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
20425 \begin_layout Standard
20426 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
20428 When you insert a margin note via the menu
20430 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20432 \begin_inset space ~
20437 or the toolbar button
20440 arg "marginalnote-insert"
20459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20466 appearing within your text.
20467 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20468 's representation of your margin
20477 \begin_layout Standard
20478 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
20482 \begin_inset Marginal
20485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20487 This is a marginal note.
20495 \begin_layout Standard
20496 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
20497 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
20498 pages, right on odd pages.
20501 \begin_layout Standard
20502 For further information about marginal notes see the section
20505 \begin_inset space ~
20513 \begin_inset space ~
20521 \begin_layout Section
20522 Graphics and Images
20523 \begin_inset Index idx
20526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20533 \begin_inset Index idx
20536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20543 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20545 name "sec:Graphics"
20552 \begin_layout Standard
20553 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
20554 you want and click on the toolbar icon
20557 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
20562 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20566 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
20569 \begin_layout Standard
20570 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
20575 tab allows you to choose your image file.
20576 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
20578 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
20579 \begin_inset space ~
20583 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20585 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
20592 \begin_layout Standard
20597 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
20598 of the image in the output.
20599 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
20603 \begin_inset space ~
20607 \begin_inset space ~
20616 \begin_inset space ~
20620 \begin_inset space ~
20624 \begin_inset space ~
20629 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
20630 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
20638 \begin_layout Standard
20642 \begin_inset space ~
20646 \begin_inset space ~
20651 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
20652 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
20654 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
20659 \begin_inset space ~
20664 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
20665 with the image size is printed.
20668 \begin_layout Standard
20669 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
20670 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
20672 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
20675 \begin_layout Standard
20677 \begin_inset Graphics
20678 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
20686 \begin_layout Standard
20687 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
20688 the image into a float, see section
20689 \begin_inset space ~
20693 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20695 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
20702 \begin_layout Subsection
20704 \begin_inset Index idx
20707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20714 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20716 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
20723 \begin_layout Standard
20724 You can insert images in any known file format.
20725 But as we explained in section
20726 \begin_inset space ~
20730 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20732 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20736 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
20738 therefore uses the program
20742 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
20743 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
20744 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
20745 \begin_inset space ~
20749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20751 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
20758 \begin_layout Standard
20759 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
20762 \begin_layout Description
20764 \begin_inset space ~
20767 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
20768 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
20769 Well-known bitmap image formats are
20770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20773 Graphics Interchange Format
20774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20777 (GIF, file extension
20778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20786 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20790 \begin_inset Index idx
20793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20825 Portable Network Graphics
20826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20829 (PNG, file extension
20830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20838 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20842 \begin_inset Index idx
20845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20877 Joint Photographic Experts Group
20878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20881 (JPG, file extension
20882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20906 \begin_inset Index idx
20909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20940 \begin_layout Description
20942 \begin_inset space ~
20945 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
20947 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
20948 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
20949 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
20950 \begin_inset Newline newline
20953 Scalable image formats can be
20954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20957 Scalable Vector Graphics
20958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20961 (SVG, file extension
20962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20974 \begin_inset Index idx
20977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21006 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21009 Encapsulated PostScript
21010 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21013 (EPS, file extension
21014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21026 \begin_inset Index idx
21029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21058 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21061 Portable Document Format
21062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21065 (PDF, file extension
21066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21078 \begin_inset Index idx
21081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21096 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21097 result will not be scalable.
21098 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21104 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21112 \begin_layout Standard
21113 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21120 \begin_layout Subsection
21121 Grouping of Image Settings
21122 \begin_inset Index idx
21125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21126 Images ! Settings grouping
21134 \begin_layout Standard
21135 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21137 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21138 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21140 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21141 need to manually change each of them.
21145 \begin_layout Standard
21146 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21149 \begin_inset space ~
21153 \begin_inset space ~
21165 \begin_inset space ~
21169 \begin_inset space ~
21175 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21176 and checking the name of the desired group.
21179 \begin_layout Section
21181 \begin_inset Index idx
21184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21191 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21200 \begin_layout Standard
21201 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21204 arg "tabular-insert"
21209 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21213 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
21214 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21215 from the rest of the table.
21216 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21217 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21219 Here is an example table:
21222 \begin_layout Standard
21224 \begin_inset Tabular
21225 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21226 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21227 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21228 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21229 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21230 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21404 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21430 \begin_layout Subsection
21434 \begin_layout Standard
21435 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
21438 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
21442 This brings up the table dialog.
21443 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
21444 cursor is placed currently.
21445 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
21446 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
21447 done on all of your selection.
21450 \begin_layout Standard
21451 In addition to the table dialog, the
21454 \begin_inset space ~
21459 helps you in setting table properties.
21460 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
21463 \begin_layout Standard
21467 \begin_inset space ~
21472 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
21473 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
21474 current cell respectively.
21475 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
21477 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
21478 of text, see section
21479 \begin_inset space ~
21483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21485 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
21492 \begin_layout Standard
21493 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
21494 using the check box
21503 This will merge the cells to
21507 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
21508 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
21509 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
21510 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
21511 in the last row without the upper border:
21514 \begin_layout Standard
21516 \begin_inset Tabular
21517 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
21518 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
21519 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21520 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
21521 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21522 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21533 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21542 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21618 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21653 \begin_layout Standard
21654 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21655 -arguments for the table.
21656 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
21657 explained in the chapter
21664 \begin_inset space ~
21670 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
21671 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
21672 but are visible in the output.
21675 \begin_layout Standard
21676 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21684 Most DVI-viewers are
21688 able to display rotations.
21696 \begin_layout Standard
21701 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
21706 adds lines for all cell borders.
21709 \begin_layout Subsection
21711 \begin_inset Index idx
21714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21715 Tables ! Multi-page
21721 \begin_inset Index idx
21724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21733 \begin_layout Standard
21734 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
21737 \begin_inset space ~
21741 \begin_inset space ~
21749 \begin_inset space ~
21754 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
21755 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
21758 \begin_layout Description
21763 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21764 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
21765 Except for the first page, if
21768 \begin_inset space ~
21776 \begin_layout Description
21780 \begin_inset space ~
21785 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
21786 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
21789 \begin_layout Description
21794 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21795 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
21796 except for the last page, if
21799 \begin_inset space ~
21807 \begin_layout Description
21811 \begin_inset space ~
21816 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
21817 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
21820 \begin_layout Description
21821 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
21822 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
21824 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21828 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
21831 \begin_inset space ~
21839 \begin_layout Standard
21840 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
21841 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
21842 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
21848 In this context, first means first in this order:
21851 \begin_inset space ~
21863 \begin_inset space ~
21868 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
21871 \begin_layout Standard
21873 \begin_inset Tabular
21874 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
21875 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
21876 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
21877 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21878 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21879 <row endfirsthead="true">
21880 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21886 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
21891 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21900 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21910 <row endfirsthead="true">
21911 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21922 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21931 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21943 <row endhead="true">
21944 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21955 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21964 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21974 <row endhead="true">
21975 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21986 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21995 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22007 <row endfoot="true">
22008 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22019 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22028 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22059 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23000 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23009 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23018 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23029 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23060 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23091 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23122 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23153 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23184 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23215 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23246 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23277 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23308 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23339 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23370 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23401 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23432 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23463 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23494 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23525 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23556 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23587 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23618 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23649 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23680 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23711 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23742 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23762 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23773 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23804 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23835 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23866 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23897 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23928 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23959 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23989 <row endlastfoot="true">
23990 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24001 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24010 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24027 \begin_layout Subsection
24029 \begin_inset Index idx
24032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24041 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24048 \begin_layout Standard
24049 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24050 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24051 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24052 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24056 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24059 \begin_layout Standard
24060 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24061 for the column in the table dialog.
24062 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24063 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24067 \begin_layout Standard
24069 \begin_inset Tabular
24070 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24071 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24072 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24073 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24074 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24094 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24163 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24219 This is longer now.
24224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24275 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24276 This is longer now.
24281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24307 \begin_layout Standard
24308 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
24309 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
24313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24314 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
24315 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
24321 Selection with the mouse or with
24325 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
24326 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
24327 the selection from outside the table.
24330 \begin_layout Section
24332 \begin_inset Index idx
24335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24351 \begin_layout Subsection
24355 \begin_layout Standard
24356 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
24357 have a fixed location.
24359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24366 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
24374 \begin_inset space ~
24379 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
24380 too many notes on the current page.
24383 \begin_layout Standard
24384 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
24385 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
24386 and pages without text.
24387 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
24388 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
24389 Floats are therefore numbered.
24390 Referencing is described in section
24391 \begin_inset space ~
24395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24397 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24404 \begin_layout Standard
24405 To insert a float, use the menu
24407 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24411 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
24412 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
24414 After the label you can insert the caption text.
24415 \begin_inset Index idx
24418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24424 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
24425 paragraph within the float.
24426 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
24427 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
24428 left-clicking on the box label.
24429 A closed float box looks like this:
24430 \begin_inset Graphics
24431 filename clipart/float.png
24436 – a gray button with a red label.
24439 \begin_layout Standard
24440 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
24442 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
24445 \begin_layout Subsection
24447 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24449 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24454 \begin_inset Index idx
24457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24458 Floats ! Figure floats
24466 \begin_layout Standard
24468 \begin_inset space ~
24472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24474 reference "fig:A-star-in"
24478 was created using the menu
24480 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24481 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24487 arg "float-insert figure"
24491 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
24494 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24500 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24504 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
24505 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
24507 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24509 \begin_inset space ~
24517 arg "layout-paragraph"
24523 \begin_layout Standard
24524 \begin_inset Float figure
24531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24533 \begin_inset Graphics
24534 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24544 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24549 name "fig:A-star-in"
24566 \begin_layout Standard
24567 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
24568 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
24570 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24579 ) and refer to it using the menu
24581 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24587 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
24591 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
24592 vague references like
24593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24600 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
24601 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
24603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24611 For more about cross-references, see section
24612 \begin_inset space ~
24616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24618 reference "sec:Cross-References"
24625 \begin_layout Standard
24626 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
24627 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
24628 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
24629 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
24630 as described in section
24631 \begin_inset space ~
24635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24637 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
24643 \begin_inset space ~
24647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24649 reference "fig:Two-images"
24653 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
24654 You can also set the images one below the other.
24656 \begin_inset space ~
24660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24662 reference "fig:Undefinable"
24667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24669 reference "fig:Star"
24673 are the subfigures.
24676 \begin_layout Standard
24677 \begin_inset Float figure
24684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24685 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24689 \begin_inset Float figure
24696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24697 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24700 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24702 name "fig:Undefinable"
24714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24715 \begin_inset Graphics
24716 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
24728 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24732 \begin_inset Float figure
24739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24740 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24743 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24758 \begin_inset Graphics
24759 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
24771 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
24777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24778 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24781 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24783 name "fig:Two-images"
24800 \begin_layout Subsection
24802 \begin_inset Index idx
24805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24806 Floats ! Table floats
24814 \begin_layout Standard
24815 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
24817 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24818 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
24821 or the toolbar button
24824 arg "float-insert table"
24828 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
24829 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
24830 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
24832 \begin_inset space ~
24836 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24838 reference "tab:Table-float"
24845 \begin_layout Standard
24846 \begin_inset Float table
24853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24854 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24859 name "tab:Table-float"
24871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24873 \begin_inset Tabular
24874 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
24875 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24876 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24877 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24878 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25005 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25026 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25029 \end{array}\right]$
25037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25050 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25071 \begin_layout Subsection
25073 \begin_inset Index idx
25076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25085 \begin_layout Standard
25087 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25088 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25089 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25091 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25099 \begin_inset space ~
25107 \begin_layout Section
25109 \begin_inset Index idx
25112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25121 \begin_layout Standard
25123 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25125 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25126 \begin_inset space \space{}
25133 \begin_layout Standard
25134 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25135 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25137 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25141 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25142 and its alignment within the page.
25145 \begin_layout Standard
25147 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25157 height_special "totalheight"
25162 backgroundcolor "none"
25165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25168 This is a minipage.
25169 The text is set in an italic style.
25172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25175 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25176 another formatting.
25184 \begin_layout Standard
25185 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25188 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25192 as described in section
25193 \begin_inset space ~
25197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25199 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25204 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25210 \begin_layout Standard
25211 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25221 height_special "totalheight"
25226 backgroundcolor "none"
25229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25230 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25231 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25237 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25241 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25251 height_special "totalheight"
25256 backgroundcolor "none"
25259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25260 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
25261 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
25269 \begin_layout Standard
25270 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25276 \begin_layout Standard
25277 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
25279 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
25286 \begin_inset space ~
25294 \begin_layout Chapter
25295 Mathematical Formulas
25296 \begin_inset Index idx
25299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25306 \begin_inset Index idx
25309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25338 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25340 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
25347 \begin_layout Standard
25348 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
25353 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
25356 \begin_layout Section
25358 \begin_inset Index idx
25361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25370 \begin_layout Standard
25371 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
25384 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
25386 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
25387 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
25388 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
25390 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25396 \begin_layout Standard
25397 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
25401 \begin_inset space ~
25406 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
25409 \begin_layout Standard
25410 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
25411 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
25414 \begin_layout Standard
25415 This is a line with an inline formula
25416 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
25422 \begin_layout Standard
25423 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
25424 paragraph, like this one:
25425 \begin_inset Formula
25432 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
25435 \begin_layout Standard
25437 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
25439 For example, typing
25440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25453 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
25454 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
25458 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
25461 \begin_inset space ~
25469 \begin_layout Subsection
25470 Navigating in Formulas
25471 \begin_inset Index idx
25474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25483 \begin_layout Standard
25484 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
25485 achieved with the arrow keys.
25487 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
25488 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
25493 will leave a formula construct (a square root
25494 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
25498 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
25502 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25505 \end{array}\right]$
25513 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
25518 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
25519 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
25522 \begin_layout Standard
25527 , printed in this document as
25528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25532 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25539 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
25540 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
25541 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
25546 For example, if you want
25547 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
25555 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25565 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25569 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25574 , since in the latter case only the
25577 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
25582 will be under the square root sign:
25583 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
25589 \begin_layout Standard
25590 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
25592 \begin_inset Formula
25594 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25603 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
25604 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
25607 \begin_layout Subsection
25611 \begin_layout Standard
25612 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
25613 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
25617 and a cursor movement key to select text.
25618 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
25619 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
25620 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
25621 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
25625 \begin_layout Subsection
25626 Exponents and Subscripts
25627 \begin_inset Index idx
25630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25637 \begin_inset Index idx
25640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25649 \begin_layout Standard
25650 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
25653 arg "math-superscript"
25659 arg "math-subscript"
25662 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
25664 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
25667 , type in a formula
25670 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25680 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
25686 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
25690 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
25696 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25702 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
25704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25711 , you have to use an extra
25715 to separate the circumflex and the character.
25716 For example, if you want
25717 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
25723 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25729 Subscripts are similar: To get
25730 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
25736 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25744 \begin_layout Subsection
25746 \begin_inset Index idx
25749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25758 \begin_layout Standard
25759 Create a fraction either with the command
25765 or by using the icon
25768 arg "math-insert \\frac"
25774 \begin_inset space ~
25780 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
25781 The cursor is above the fraction line.
25782 To move it to the bottom, simply press
25787 To move back up, press
25792 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
25793 \begin_inset Formula
25795 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
25798 \end{array}\right)}\right]
25806 \begin_layout Subsection
25808 \begin_inset Index idx
25811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25820 \begin_layout Standard
25821 Roots can be created using the
25824 \begin_inset space ~
25832 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
25838 arg "math-insert \\root"
25860 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
25866 always produces a square root.
25869 \begin_layout Subsection
25870 Operators with Limits
25871 \begin_inset Index idx
25874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25881 \begin_inset Index idx
25884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25891 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25893 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
25900 \begin_layout Standard
25902 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
25906 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
25909 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
25910 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25911 by entering them as you would enter a super-
25912 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
25913 The sum operator will automatically place its
25914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25921 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
25923 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
25927 \begin_inset Formula
25929 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
25934 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
25938 \begin_layout Standard
25939 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
25941 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
25942 behind the operator and using the menu
25944 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25945 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25947 \begin_inset space ~
25951 \begin_inset space ~
25965 \begin_layout Standard
25966 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
25967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25975 \begin_inset Index idx
25978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25985 \begin_inset Formula
25987 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
25992 which will place the
25993 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
25997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26005 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26006 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26012 \begin_layout Standard
26013 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26020 Have a look at section
26021 \begin_inset space ~
26025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26027 reference "subsec:Functions"
26031 for an explanation of function macros.
26034 \begin_layout Subsection
26036 \begin_inset Index idx
26039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26048 \begin_layout Standard
26049 Most math symbols can be found in the
26052 \begin_inset space ~
26057 under one of several categories; including
26074 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26078 \begin_layout Standard
26079 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26080 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26081 don't have to use the
26084 \begin_inset space ~
26089 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26091 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26094 \begin_layout Subsection
26096 \begin_inset Index idx
26099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26108 \begin_layout Standard
26109 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26115 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26121 \begin_inset space ~
26129 arg "math-insert \\space"
26133 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26134 For example, the sequence
26139 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26142 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26144 \begin_inset Graphics
26145 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26150 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26151 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26152 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26153 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26154 , because they are negative
26156 Here are two examples:
26159 \begin_layout Standard
26169 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26175 \begin_layout Standard
26185 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26191 \begin_layout Subsection
26193 \begin_inset Index idx
26196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26203 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26205 name "subsec:Functions"
26212 \begin_layout Standard
26216 \begin_inset space ~
26221 contains under the button
26224 arg "math-insert \\functions"
26227 a number of function macros, such as
26228 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
26232 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
26240 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
26247 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
26248 avoid confusions, because
26249 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
26253 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
26259 \begin_layout Standard
26260 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
26262 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
26266 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
26272 \begin_layout Standard
26273 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
26274 are placed, as described in section
26275 \begin_inset space ~
26279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26281 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26288 \begin_layout Subsection
26290 \begin_inset Index idx
26293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26302 \begin_layout Standard
26303 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
26305 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
26306 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
26307 commands, for example, to enter
26308 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26311 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
26312 Our example is entered by typing
26317 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26324 \begin_inset space ~
26328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26330 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
26334 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
26337 \begin_layout Standard
26338 \begin_inset Float table
26345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26346 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26349 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26351 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
26355 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
26363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26365 \begin_inset Tabular
26366 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
26367 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26368 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26369 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26370 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26454 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
26464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26508 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
26518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26562 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
26572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26616 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
26626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26670 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
26680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26724 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
26734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26778 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
26788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26832 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
26842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26886 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
26896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26931 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
26952 \begin_layout Standard
26953 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
26956 \begin_inset space ~
26964 arg "math-insert \\hat"
26967 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
26971 \begin_layout Section
26972 Brackets and Delimiters
26973 \begin_inset Index idx
26976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26983 \begin_inset Index idx
26986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26995 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27002 \begin_layout Standard
27003 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27005 For some purposes, using just the keys
27010 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27011 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27012 toolbar delimiter icon
27015 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27019 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27020 \begin_inset Formula
27022 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27030 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27031 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27035 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27038 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27044 \begin_inset Formula
27046 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27054 \begin_layout Standard
27055 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27056 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27060 \begin_layout Standard
27061 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27062 left side and right side.
27063 If you use the option
27066 \begin_inset space ~
27071 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27072 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27074 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27079 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27080 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27083 \begin_layout Standard
27084 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27085 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27086 is to go inside the brackets.
27087 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27092 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27093 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27094 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27098 arg "math-delim ( )"
27104 \begin_layout Section
27105 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27106 \begin_inset Index idx
27109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27116 \begin_inset Index idx
27119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27126 \begin_inset Index idx
27129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27130 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27138 \begin_layout Standard
27139 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27143 \begin_inset space ~
27151 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27155 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27156 Here is an example:
27157 \begin_inset Formula
27159 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27168 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27169 \begin_inset space ~
27173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27175 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27180 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27181 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27182 This alignment is set in the box
27187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27236 for every column as default.
27237 For example, the sequence
27238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27249 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
27250 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
27251 corresponds to the relevant column.
27252 The result will look like this:
27253 \begin_inset Formula
27256 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
27257 column & has & has\,right\\
27258 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
27267 \begin_layout Standard
27268 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
27271 arg "newline-insert newline"
27274 while the cursor is in the matrix.
27275 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
27277 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27280 or the math toolbar.
27283 \begin_layout Standard
27284 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
27285 It can be created with the menu
27287 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27288 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27290 \begin_inset space ~
27302 Here is an example:
27303 \begin_inset Formula
27317 \begin_layout Standard
27318 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27321 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
27324 arg "newline-insert newline"
27328 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
27333 arg "newline-insert newline"
27336 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
27337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27344 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
27345 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
27346 A new row is created by every further entry of
27349 arg "newline-insert newline"
27353 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
27354 Here is an example:
27355 \begin_inset Formula
27357 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
27358 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
27363 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
27364 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
27365 \begin_inset Formula
27367 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
27375 \begin_layout Standard
27376 The multi-line formula type described here is called
27383 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
27384 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
27385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27387 reference "eq:asquared"
27392 The other types are described in section
27393 \begin_inset space ~
27397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27399 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27406 \begin_layout Section
27407 Formula Numbering and Referencing
27408 \begin_inset Index idx
27411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27412 Math ! Formula numbering
27418 \begin_inset Index idx
27421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27422 Math ! Referencing formulas
27428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27430 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27437 \begin_layout Standard
27438 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
27440 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27441 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27443 \begin_inset space ~
27447 \begin_inset space ~
27455 arg "math-number-toggle"
27459 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27460 within parentheses.
27461 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
27462 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
27463 the document class.
27464 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
27465 separated by a dot:
27466 \begin_inset Formula
27476 arg "math-number-toggle"
27479 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
27480 You can only number displayed formulas.
27483 \begin_layout Standard
27484 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
27486 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27487 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27489 \begin_inset space ~
27493 \begin_inset space ~
27501 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
27504 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
27505 \begin_inset Formula
27508 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
27514 To number all lines use the shortcut
27517 arg "math-number-toggle"
27523 \begin_layout Standard
27524 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
27527 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
27528 A label is inserted with the menu
27530 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27539 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
27540 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
27541 It is recommended that you use the suggested
27542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27553 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
27554 label type when you have many labels in your document.
27555 We inserted in the following example the label
27556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27563 in the second line:
27564 \begin_inset Formula
27566 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
27567 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
27572 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
27573 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
27574 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
27576 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27578 \begin_inset space ~
27586 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27590 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
27591 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27592 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
27593 as the formula number:
27596 \begin_layout Standard
27597 This is a cross-reference to equation (
27598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27600 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27607 \begin_layout Standard
27608 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
27609 's cross-reference box are described in section
27610 \begin_inset space ~
27614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27616 reference "sec:Cross-References"
27621 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
27629 \begin_layout Section
27630 User defined math macros
27631 \begin_inset Index idx
27634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27643 \begin_layout Standard
27645 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
27646 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
27647 Math macros are explained in section
27650 \begin_inset space ~
27662 \begin_layout Section
27666 \begin_layout Subsection
27668 \begin_inset Index idx
27671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27680 \begin_layout Standard
27681 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
27682 To set a font in a formula, use the
27685 \begin_inset space ~
27693 arg "math-insert \\font"
27696 , or enter its command, listed in table
27697 \begin_inset space ~
27701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27703 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27710 \begin_layout Standard
27711 \begin_inset Float table
27718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27719 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27722 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27724 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
27728 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
27736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27738 \begin_inset Tabular
27739 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
27740 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27741 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27742 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27774 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
27782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27801 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
27809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27828 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
27836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27861 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
27869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27888 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
27896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27915 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
27923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27949 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
27957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27976 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
27984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28010 \begin_layout Standard
28011 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28019 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28035 \begin_layout Standard
28036 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28037 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28042 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28043 space when you need a space in the box.
28044 Here is an example where
28045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28056 denotes the set of numbers:
28057 \begin_inset Formula
28059 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28067 \begin_layout Standard
28068 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28069 You can, for example, put a character in
28078 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28082 \begin_inset Newline newline
28085 So it is better not to use this feature.
28088 \begin_layout Standard
28089 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28090 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28094 \begin_inset Newline newline
28097 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28103 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28104 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28110 \begin_layout Standard
28117 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28120 \begin_layout Standard
28121 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28123 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28124 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28126 \begin_inset space ~
28134 \begin_layout Subsection
28136 \begin_inset Index idx
28139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28148 \begin_layout Standard
28149 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
28151 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
28155 \begin_inset space ~
28159 \begin_inset space ~
28167 \begin_inset space ~
28175 arg "math-insert \\font"
28179 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28180 in black instead of blue.
28181 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
28182 Here is an example:
28183 \begin_inset Formula
28186 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
28187 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
28196 \begin_layout Subsection
28198 \begin_inset Index idx
28201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28210 \begin_layout Standard
28211 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
28212 automatically chosen in most situations.
28230 For most characters,
28238 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
28239 and certain other structures, are set larger in
28244 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
28245 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
28246 thinks are appropriate.
28247 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
28250 arg "math-insert \\style"
28254 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
28255 For example, you can set
28256 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
28259 , which is normally in
28268 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
28272 The four styles are used in the following example:
28275 \begin_layout Standard
28276 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
28280 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
28284 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
28288 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
28294 \begin_layout Standard
28295 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
28296 is set in a particular size with the menu
28298 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28300 \begin_inset space ~
28305 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
28306 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
28307 will be adjusted to correspond.
28308 As an example here is a formula in the font size
28309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28319 \begin_layout Standard
28323 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
28329 \begin_layout Section
28330 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28332 \begin_inset Index idx
28335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28342 \begin_inset Index idx
28345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28354 \begin_layout Standard
28356 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
28357 that are in common use.
28360 \begin_layout Subsection
28361 Enabling AMS-Support
28364 \begin_layout Standard
28365 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
28366 the document by selecting the checkbox
28369 \begin_inset space ~
28373 \begin_inset space ~
28377 \begin_inset space ~
28384 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28388 \begin_inset Index idx
28391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28392 Document ! Settings
28400 \begin_inset space ~
28406 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28407 -errors in formulas,
28408 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
28411 \begin_layout Subsection
28413 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28415 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28420 \begin_inset Index idx
28423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28424 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28432 \begin_layout Standard
28433 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
28434 provides a selection of different formula types.
28436 allows you to choose between
28457 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
28458 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28465 , for an explanation of these formula types.
28468 \begin_layout Chapter
28472 \begin_layout Section
28474 \begin_inset Index idx
28477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28484 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28486 name "sec:Cross-References"
28493 \begin_layout Standard
28494 One of \SpecialChar LyX
28495 's strengths is cross-references.
28496 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
28498 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
28499 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
28500 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
28503 \begin_layout Enumerate
28507 \begin_layout Enumerate
28508 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28510 name "enu:Second-item"
28517 \begin_layout Enumerate
28521 \begin_layout Standard
28522 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
28524 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28527 or by pressing the toolbar button
28534 A gray label box like this:
28535 \begin_inset Graphics
28536 filename clipart/label.png
28540 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
28542 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
28544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28557 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28577 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
28578 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
28580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28594 \begin_layout Standard
28595 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
28597 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28600 or the toolbar button
28603 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28607 A gray cross-reference box like this:
28608 \begin_inset Graphics
28609 filename clipart/reference.png
28613 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
28615 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
28616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28628 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
28632 \begin_layout Standard
28633 As an alternative to
28635 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28638 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
28643 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
28644 to the actual cursor position via the menu
28646 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28658 \begin_layout Standard
28659 Here is our cross-reference: Item
28660 \begin_inset space ~
28664 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28666 reference "enu:Second-item"
28673 \begin_layout Standard
28674 It is recommended to use a protected space
28678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28679 described in section
28680 \begin_inset space ~
28684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28686 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
28695 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
28696 line breaks between them.
28699 \begin_layout Standard
28700 There are eight formats of cross-references:
28703 \begin_layout Description
28704 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
28705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28707 reference "fig:Two-images"
28714 \begin_layout Description
28715 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
28716 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
28718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28728 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28735 \begin_layout Description
28736 <page>: prints the page number: Page
28737 \begin_inset space ~
28741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28742 LatexCommand pageref
28743 reference "fig:Two-images"
28750 \begin_layout Description
28752 \begin_inset space ~
28756 \begin_inset space ~
28759 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
28760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28761 LatexCommand vpageref
28762 reference "fig:Two-images"
28767 \begin_inset Newline newline
28770 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
28771 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
28772 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
28773 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
28774 it prints “on the next page”.
28775 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
28778 \begin_layout Description
28780 \begin_inset space ~
28784 \begin_inset space ~
28788 \begin_inset space ~
28791 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
28792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28794 reference "fig:Two-images"
28799 \begin_inset Newline newline
28802 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
28808 ; otherwise it behaves like
28812 \begin_inset space ~
28816 \begin_inset space ~
28825 \begin_layout Description
28827 \begin_inset space ~
28830 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
28831 \begin_inset Newline newline
28835 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28843 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28853 \begin_inset Index idx
28856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28858 packages ! prettyref
28864 \begin_inset Index idx
28867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28869 packages ! refstyle
28880 \begin_inset Newline newline
28883 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
28884 -package should be used for this feature by setting
28887 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
28891 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28892 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28900 is the default and preferred because
28904 supports only English documents.
28905 The format is specified by using the command
28917 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28918 preamble of the document.
28919 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
28921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28937 \begin_inset Newline newline
28944 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
28949 \begin_inset Newline newline
28960 predefines reference formats for all available types.
28961 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
28963 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
28964 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
28969 , you might do so as follows:
28970 \begin_inset Newline newline
28977 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
28982 \begin_inset Newline newline
28985 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
28986 the package documentation
28987 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28989 key "prettyref,refstyle"
28995 \begin_inset Newline newline
29006 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29013 \begin_layout Description
29015 \begin_inset space ~
29018 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29020 LatexCommand nameref
29021 reference "fig:Two-images"
29028 \begin_layout Description
29030 \begin_inset space ~
29033 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29034 label for the reference:
29035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29036 LatexCommand labelonly
29037 reference "fig:Two-images"
29042 \begin_inset Newline newline
29045 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29046 Code, if you want to issue a command
29047 that \SpecialChar LyX
29053 , then you may want to use the
29056 \begin_inset space ~
29061 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29071 This is the form needed for e.
29072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29076 \begin_inset space \space{}
29083 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29084 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29086 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29090 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29094 \begin_layout Standard
29095 You can only use the style
29099 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29103 is always possible.
29106 \begin_layout Standard
29107 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29108 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29110 Referencing formulas is explained in section
29111 \begin_inset space ~
29115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29117 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
29124 \begin_layout Standard
29125 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
29129 \begin_inset space ~
29133 \begin_inset space ~
29138 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
29139 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
29142 \begin_inset space ~
29147 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
29148 You can also go back with the toolbar button
29151 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
29157 \begin_layout Standard
29158 You can change labels at any time.
29159 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
29160 do not need to think about this.
29163 \begin_layout Standard
29164 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
29166 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
29170 \begin_layout Standard
29171 References are described in detail in the section
29172 \begin_inset space ~
29182 \begin_inset space ~
29190 \begin_layout Section
29191 Table of Contents and other Listings
29192 \begin_inset Index idx
29195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29202 \begin_inset Index idx
29205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29206 Navigating ! Outline
29212 \begin_inset Index idx
29215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29222 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29231 \begin_layout Subsection
29233 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29235 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
29242 \begin_layout Standard
29243 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
29245 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29246 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29248 \begin_inset space ~
29252 \begin_inset space ~
29258 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
29260 If you click on it, the
29264 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
29265 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
29266 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
29268 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
29270 \begin_inset space ~
29275 that is described in section
29276 \begin_inset space ~
29280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29282 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
29289 \begin_layout Standard
29290 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
29291 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
29293 \begin_inset space ~
29297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29299 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
29303 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
29305 \begin_inset space ~
29309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29311 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
29315 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
29317 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
29320 \begin_layout Subsection
29321 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
29322 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29324 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
29331 \begin_layout Standard
29332 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
29334 You can insert them via the
29336 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29340 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
29343 \begin_layout Section
29344 URLs and Hyperlinks
29345 \begin_inset Index idx
29348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29355 \begin_inset Index idx
29358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29367 \begin_layout Subsection
29369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29378 \begin_layout Standard
29379 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
29381 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29387 \begin_layout Standard
29388 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
29390 \begin_inset Flex URL
29393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29395 https://www.lyx.org
29403 \begin_layout Standard
29404 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
29410 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
29414 \begin_layout Standard
29415 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29423 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29432 \begin_layout Subsection
29434 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29436 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
29443 \begin_layout Standard
29444 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
29446 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29449 or with the toolbar button
29456 The appearing dialog has two fields:
29465 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
29466 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
29467 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29469 name "LyX's homepage"
29470 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29475 , an Email address like this:
29476 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29478 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
29479 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
29485 , or a link to a file.
29490 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29498 \begin_layout Standard
29499 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
29501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29512 to the link target.
29515 \begin_layout Standard
29516 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
29517 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
29518 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
29519 the text style dialog.
29520 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
29524 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29526 name "LyX's homepage"
29527 target "https://www.lyx.org"
29535 \begin_layout Standard
29536 The link text color can be changed, when the option
29540 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
29542 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29543 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29547 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
29549 \begin_inset Newline newline
29557 \begin_inset Newline newline
29564 in the PDF Properties dialog.
29567 \begin_layout Section
29569 \begin_inset Index idx
29572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29579 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29581 name "sec:Appendices"
29588 \begin_layout Standard
29589 Appendices are created with the menu
29591 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29593 \begin_inset space ~
29597 \begin_inset space ~
29603 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
29604 as the appendix part of the book.
29605 This part is marked with a red borderline.
29608 \begin_layout Standard
29609 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
29610 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
29611 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
29612 and the subsection number.
29613 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
29617 \begin_layout Standard
29619 \begin_inset space ~
29623 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29625 reference "chap:Credits"
29630 \begin_inset space ~
29634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29636 reference "subsec:Export"
29643 \begin_layout Section
29645 \begin_inset Index idx
29648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29655 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29657 name "sec:Bibliography"
29664 \begin_layout Standard
29665 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
29667 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
29668 \begin_inset space ~
29672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29674 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29681 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
29686 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
29687 \begin_inset space ~
29691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29693 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
29698 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
29699 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
29700 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
29704 using a bibliography database.
29707 \begin_layout Standard
29708 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
29709 use two bibliographies in this document, a
29713 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
29714 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29715 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29716 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
29717 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
29720 \begin_layout Subsection
29721 The Bibliography Environment
29722 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29724 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29731 \begin_layout Standard
29736 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
29738 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
29747 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
29749 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
29750 of ASCII characters only.
29754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29756 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29759 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
29765 \begin_inset Newline newline
29769 \begin_inset Flex URL
29772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29774 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
29784 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
29787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29794 , a short form of its title, as the key.
29795 \begin_inset Newline newline
29802 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
29803 the number of the entry.
29808 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29817 \begin_layout Standard
29818 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
29820 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29823 or the toolbar button
29826 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
29830 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
29831 containing the available citations.
29832 Select one or more keys from the list and
29842 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
29843 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
29847 \begin_layout Standard
29848 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
29849 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
29850 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
29852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29862 \begin_layout Standard
29866 Companion Second Edition
29869 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29871 key "latexcompanion"
29879 \begin_layout Standard
29880 The \SpecialChar LyX
29881 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
29882 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29892 \begin_layout Standard
29893 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29900 \begin_inset Index idx
29903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29911 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
29912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29923 Author A and Author B(Year)
29924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29931 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
29933 Then, if you select
29936 \begin_inset space ~
29941 in the document settings
29942 \begin_inset Index idx
29945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29946 Document ! Settings
29953 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
29955 \begin_inset space ~
29961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29963 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
29970 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
29973 \begin_layout Standard
29974 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
29977 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29979 \begin_inset space ~
29987 arg "layout-paragraph"
29991 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
29994 \begin_layout Subsection
29995 Bibliography databases
29996 \begin_inset Index idx
29999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30000 Bibliography ! Databases
30006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30008 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30015 \begin_layout Standard
30016 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
30021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30022 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
30024 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
30025 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
30030 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
30032 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
30033 your working field in a database.
30034 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
30035 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
30036 list for that document.
30037 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
30041 \begin_layout Standard
30042 The database is a text file with the file extension
30043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30054 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
30055 The format is explained in
30056 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30063 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30065 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30067 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
30073 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
30074 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
30075 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
30077 \begin_inset Flex URL
30080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30082 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
30090 \begin_layout Standard
30092 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
30093 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30094 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
30096 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
30098 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
30099 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
30100 Those are addressed by
30105 \begin_inset Index idx
30108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30110 packages ! biblatex
30116 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30117 (although it has been significantly
30118 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30128 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30129 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30130 might conversely fail to correctly
30131 handle databases that use specific
30140 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
30144 \begin_layout Standard
30145 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30150 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
30152 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30156 \begin_inset Index idx
30159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30160 Document ! Settings
30172 \begin_inset space ~
30177 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30186 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30188 \begin_inset Index idx
30191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30192 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30201 \begin_layout Standard
30202 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30205 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30210 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30212 \begin_inset space ~
30218 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
30219 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30227 Add bibliography to TOC
30229 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
30234 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
30235 in the document or just the cited references.
30237 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
30242 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
30243 differ from the encoding of the document.
30248 \begin_layout Standard
30249 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30250 style file is a text file with the file extension
30251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30262 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
30263 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30264 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
30265 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
30267 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
30272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30273 For information on how this is done, have a look at
30274 \begin_inset Newline newline
30278 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30280 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
30290 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30295 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
30299 \begin_layout Standard
30300 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
30303 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30305 \begin_inset Index idx
30308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30309 Bibliography ! Biblatex
30315 \begin_inset Index idx
30318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30320 packages ! biblatex
30328 \begin_layout Standard
30329 Accessing a database via
30333 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30336 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30341 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30343 \begin_inset space ~
30349 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30350 you cannot select a
30355 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
30359 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30362 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
30363 As for the styles, note the following.
30368 \begin_layout Standard
30373 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
30375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30386 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
30387 file (text file with the file extension
30388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30399 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
30400 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
30402 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
30406 \begin_layout Standard
30411 styles are not set in the
30414 \begin_inset space ~
30419 dialog, but in the document settings.
30420 \begin_inset Index idx
30423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30424 Document ! Settings
30429 However, in the dialog in the
30433 field, which is only visible if you use
30437 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
30438 example how its heading will appear).
30439 These options are described in detail in the
30444 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30454 \begin_layout Standard
30455 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
30456 \begin_inset space ~
30460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30462 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30472 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30473 Bibliography Processors
30476 \begin_layout Standard
30477 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
30478 uses a bibliography processor,
30479 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
30480 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
30481 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30483 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
30484 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
30487 \begin_layout Standard
30488 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
30490 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
30491 You can do this on a general level in
30493 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30494 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30495 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30498 or for individual documents in
30500 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30501 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30505 The following variants are available by default:
30508 \begin_layout Description
30509 biber a specific, modern processor
30510 \begin_inset Index idx
30513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30520 developed exclusively for
30524 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30530 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
30535 makes use of; if you use the
30539 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
30546 \begin_layout Description
30547 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
30548 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
30549 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
30553 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
30556 \begin_layout Description
30557 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
30558 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
30562 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
30566 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
30570 features are supported.
30573 \begin_layout Standard
30574 By default (with the
30580 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30581 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30594 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30595 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30596 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30599 ), \SpecialChar LyX
30600 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
30613 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30614 -based bibliography styles).
30615 This should suit most needs.
30618 \begin_layout Standard
30619 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
30620 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
30621 (in \SpecialChar LyX
30626 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30627 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
30628 You can adjust it in
30630 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
30631 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
30632 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
30638 \begin_layout Standard
30639 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
30640 can add below the selection.
30641 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
30642 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30648 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30658 \begin_layout Subsubsection
30662 \begin_layout Standard
30664 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
30666 These are explained in detail in section
30668 Customizing Bibliographies
30672 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30677 Additional Features
30682 \begin_layout Subsection
30684 \begin_inset Index idx
30687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30688 Bibliography ! Citation format
30694 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30696 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
30703 \begin_layout Standard
30704 Many different citation formats are common, e.
30705 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30709 \begin_inset space \space{}
30712 numerical citation (as
30713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30720 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
30721 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30728 ) or author-year citations (as
30729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30738 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
30742 \begin_layout Standard
30743 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
30746 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30747 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30751 \begin_inset Index idx
30754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30755 Document ! Settings
30760 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
30766 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
30767 labels, is there to use
30770 \begin_inset space ~
30781 \begin_inset space ~
30786 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
30787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30789 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30796 \begin_layout Standard
30797 With a bibliography database (see
30798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30800 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30807 ) one has in contrary to the
30811 environment full access to the formatting styles.
30812 These style formats are available:
30815 \begin_layout Description
30817 \begin_inset space ~
30820 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
30821 -based approached without any additional packages
30822 (simple numeric citations).
30825 \begin_layout Description
30826 Biblatex loads the package
30831 \begin_inset Index idx
30834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30836 packages ! biblatex
30841 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
30843 Biblatex citation style
30847 Biblatex bibliography style
30850 Options to the package
30854 can be entered in the
30861 \begin_layout Description
30863 \begin_inset space ~
30867 \begin_inset space ~
30870 mode) loads the package
30874 with the natbib compatibility mode.
30875 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
30887 behavior very closely.
30892 this option has some additional styles.
30897 styles are also supported by this variant.
30900 \begin_layout Description
30902 \begin_inset space ~
30905 (BibTeX) loads the package
30910 \begin_inset Index idx
30913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30920 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
30923 \begin_layout Description
30925 \begin_inset space ~
30928 (BibTeX) loads the package
30933 \begin_inset Index idx
30936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30943 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
30946 \begin_layout Standard
30955 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
30957 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
30966 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
30968 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
30969 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
30971 Biblatex citation style
30974 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
30980 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
30984 \begin_layout Standard
30985 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
30986 are available in the
30991 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
30992 a name prefix such as
30993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31008 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
31009 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31013 \begin_inset space \space{}
31017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31028 \begin_layout Standard
31029 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
31031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31035 \begin_inset space \space{}
31038 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
31040 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31044 \begin_inset space \space{}
31048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31052 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31060 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31064 \begin_inset space ~
31072 \begin_inset space ~
31078 Here is a simple example where the text
31079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31083 \begin_inset space ~
31087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31090 appears after the reference:
31093 \begin_layout Quote
31095 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31098 key "latexcompanion"
31106 \begin_layout Standard
31107 All styles except for
31111 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
31113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31121 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
31125 \begin_layout Standard
31126 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
31127 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
31128 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
31133 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
31134 multi-citation (so-called
31135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31138 qualified citation lists
31139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31145 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
31150 dialog will display three columns in the field
31157 \begin_inset space ~
31165 \begin_inset space ~
31173 \begin_inset space ~
31179 If you double-click on an item's
31182 \begin_inset space ~
31190 \begin_inset space ~
31195 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
31198 General text before
31204 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
31207 \begin_layout Section
31209 \begin_inset Index idx
31212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31219 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31228 \begin_layout Standard
31229 An index entry is created if you use the menu
31231 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31233 \begin_inset space ~
31238 or the toolbar button
31245 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
31246 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
31247 by \SpecialChar LyX
31248 as the index entry.
31251 \begin_layout Standard
31252 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
31254 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31255 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31257 \begin_inset space ~
31263 A light blue box labeled
31264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31275 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
31276 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
31280 \begin_layout Standard
31281 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
31282 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31283 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
31284 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31286 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31288 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
31296 \begin_layout Subsection
31297 Grouping Index Entries
31298 \begin_inset Index idx
31301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31310 \begin_layout Standard
31311 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
31313 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
31314 lists under the entry
31315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31323 First we create the entry
31324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31332 \begin_inset space ~
31336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31338 reference "subsec:Lists"
31343 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
31344 \begin_inset space ~
31348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31350 reference "sec:Itemize"
31354 , we insert the command
31357 \begin_layout Standard
31363 \begin_layout Standard
31367 \begin_layout Standard
31373 \begin_layout Standard
31374 for the enumerated list in section
31375 \begin_inset space ~
31379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31381 reference "sec:Enumerate"
31388 \begin_layout Standard
31389 The exclamation mark
31390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31397 marks the grouping levels.
31398 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
31399 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
31400 If we don't have an index entry for
31401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31408 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
31411 \begin_layout Subsection
31413 \begin_inset Index idx
31416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31417 Index ! Page ranges
31425 \begin_layout Standard
31426 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
31428 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
31429 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
31430 an index entry in section
31431 \begin_inset space ~
31435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31437 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
31444 \begin_layout Standard
31447 Paragraph environments|(
31450 \begin_layout Standard
31451 and another entry at the end of section
31452 \begin_inset space ~
31456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31458 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
31465 \begin_layout Standard
31468 Paragraph environments|)
31471 \begin_layout Standard
31473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31493 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31496 respectively start and end the index range.
31497 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
31498 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
31499 the pages of the indexed document parts.
31500 An example is the index entry
31501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31504 Document ! Settings
31505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31511 \begin_layout Subsection
31513 \begin_inset Index idx
31516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31517 Index ! Cross referencing
31525 \begin_layout Standard
31526 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
31527 We referred for example in the index entry
31528 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31536 \begin_inset space ~
31540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31542 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
31546 ) to the index entry
31547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31554 in the same section using the entry
31557 \begin_layout Standard
31560 GIF|see{Image formats}
31563 \begin_layout Standard
31564 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31566 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
31567 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
31570 \begin_layout Subsection
31572 \begin_inset Index idx
31575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31576 Index ! Entry order
31584 \begin_layout Standard
31585 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
31586 follow the rules for the index order.
31587 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
31592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31593 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
31595 \begin_inset space ~
31599 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31601 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31610 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
31611 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
31612 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31636 \begin_inset Index idx
31639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31640 Dummy entries ! maïs
31646 \begin_inset Index idx
31649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31650 Dummy entries ! maître
31656 \begin_inset Index idx
31659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31660 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
31665 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
31666 maïs, maison, maître.
31667 To achieve this, we use the command
31670 \begin_layout Standard
31673 previous entry@current entry
31676 \begin_layout Standard
31677 In our case we want to have
31678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31693 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
31696 \begin_layout Standard
31702 \begin_layout Standard
31703 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
31704 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
31706 See the next subsection for an example.
31709 \begin_layout Subsection
31711 \begin_inset Index idx
31714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31715 Index ! Entry layout
31723 \begin_layout Standard
31724 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
31725 \begin_inset Index idx
31728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31731 This is an italic dummy entry
31736 You can also format the page number using the character
31737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31744 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31745 -command without a backslash.
31746 We can write for example
31749 \begin_layout Standard
31752 italic page number:|textit
31755 \begin_layout Standard
31756 to get the page number in italic.
31757 \begin_inset Index idx
31760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31761 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
31766 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
31767 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
31769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31785 \begin_inset space ~
31791 Have a look at section
31792 \begin_inset space ~
31796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31798 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31802 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31806 \begin_layout Standard
31807 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31815 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
31819 to generate the index, see section
31820 \begin_inset space ~
31824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31826 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
31835 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
31840 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
31841 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31844 key "latexcompanion"
31857 \begin_layout Standard
31858 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
31860 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
31861 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
31862 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
31863 If so, put the following in the preamble
31866 \begin_layout Standard
31878 \begin_layout Standard
31882 \begin_layout Standard
31888 \begin_layout Standard
31889 in the index entry.
31890 \begin_inset Index idx
31893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31894 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
31899 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
31900 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
31901 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
31904 \begin_layout Standard
31905 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
31906 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
31907 a bold font for all index entries.
31908 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
31920 documentation for details,
31921 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31923 key "makeindex,xindy"
31931 \begin_layout Subsection
31933 \begin_inset Index idx
31936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31943 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31945 name "subsec:Index-Program"
31952 \begin_layout Standard
31953 If the index generation program
31957 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
31958 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
31962 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31963 distribution, is used.
31967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31972 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
31973 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
31974 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
31975 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
31976 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
31986 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
31988 dialog, see section
31989 \begin_inset space ~
31993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31995 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32000 The available options are listed and explained in
32001 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32003 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
32009 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
32013 \begin_layout Standard
32014 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
32015 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
32018 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32019 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32023 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
32024 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
32027 \begin_layout Subsection
32031 \begin_layout Standard
32032 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
32033 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
32034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32041 next to the standard index.
32043 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
32044 that add this feature.
32051 \begin_inset Index idx
32054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32056 packages ! splitidx
32061 package to generate multiple indexes.
32062 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
32067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32068 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
32070 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32078 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32079 style, but it also includes
32080 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
32081 Please consult the package's manual for details.
32089 \begin_layout Standard
32090 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
32091 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
32093 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32094 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32097 and select the option
32099 Use multiple Indexes
32106 already contains the standard index
32107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32115 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
32116 also appear as a heading) to the
32120 input field and press the
32125 The new index now also appears in the list.
32126 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
32127 label color to the new index.
32130 \begin_layout Standard
32131 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
32134 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32141 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
32142 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
32143 are additional features:
32146 \begin_layout Itemize
32147 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
32148 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
32151 \begin_layout Itemize
32152 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
32153 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
32158 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
32159 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
32160 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
32161 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
32164 \begin_layout Itemize
32169 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
32170 code in the name of the index.
32173 \begin_layout Section
32174 Nomenclature/Glossary
32175 \begin_inset Index idx
32178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32185 \begin_inset Index idx
32188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32219 name "sec:Nomenclature"
32226 \begin_layout Standard
32227 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
32228 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
32229 called nomenclature or glossary.
32232 \begin_layout Standard
32233 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32240 \begin_inset Index idx
32243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32251 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
32253 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32260 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32264 \begin_layout Standard
32265 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
32266 and then use the menu
32268 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32274 \begin_inset space ~
32279 or the toolbar button
32282 arg "nomencl-insert"
32287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32298 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
32301 \begin_layout Standard
32302 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
32303 The first is the term or
32307 that you wish to define.
32312 of the term or symbol.
32315 \begin_layout Standard
32316 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32324 To use \SpecialChar TeX
32325 code for nomenclature entries the option
32329 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
32337 \begin_layout Subsection
32338 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
32339 \begin_inset Index idx
32342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32343 Nomenclature ! Layout
32351 \begin_layout Standard
32352 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
32356 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
32359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32363 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32371 \begin_inset Newline newline
32379 \begin_inset Newline newline
32385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32392 character starts/ends the formula.
32393 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32394 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
32396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32406 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
32416 \begin_layout Standard
32417 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32418 syntax is given in section
32419 \begin_inset space ~
32423 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32425 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32432 \begin_layout Standard
32436 \begin_inset space ~
32441 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
32443 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
32444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32448 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32455 in this document is:
32456 \begin_inset Newline newline
32461 dummy entry for the character
32466 \begin_inset Newline newline
32478 \begin_inset space ~
32488 font use the command
32517 \begin_layout Standard
32518 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
32519 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32523 \begin_inset space \space{}
32527 \begin_inset Newline newline
32543 \begin_inset Newline newline
32546 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
32547 This command will make the font of all symbols
32554 \begin_inset space ~
32562 \begin_layout Standard
32563 If the characters |
32564 \begin_inset space \space{}
32568 \begin_inset space \space{}
32572 \begin_inset space \space{}
32576 \begin_inset space \space{}
32580 \begin_inset space \space{}
32583 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
32584 code they need to be escaped
32585 by adding a quote character in front of them.
32586 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32587 LatexCommand nomenclature
32588 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
32589 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
32597 \begin_layout Subsection
32598 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
32599 \begin_inset Index idx
32602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32603 Nomenclature ! Sort order
32611 \begin_layout Standard
32612 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32613 -code of the symbol
32615 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
32617 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
32620 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32621 LatexCommand nomenclature
32623 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
32631 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32635 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
32636 LatexCommand nomenclature
32639 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
32645 They will be sorted by
32646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32668 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32672 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32675 will be sorted before the
32679 since the character
32680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32687 is considered in sorting.
32690 \begin_layout Standard
32691 To control the sort order, you can edit the
32694 \begin_inset space ~
32699 field of the nomenclature dialog.
32700 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
32702 For the example given, you can insert
32706 in this field for the
32707 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32714 will be located before
32715 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
32721 \begin_layout Standard
32722 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
32727 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32737 \begin_layout Subsection
32738 Nomenclature Options
32739 \begin_inset Index idx
32742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32743 Nomenclature ! Options
32749 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32751 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
32758 \begin_layout Standard
32763 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
32764 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
32767 \begin_layout Description
32768 refeq Appends the phrase
32769 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32784 to every nomenclature entry, where
32790 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
32793 \begin_layout Description
32794 refpage Appends the phrase
32795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32810 to every nomenclature entry, where
32816 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
32819 \begin_layout Description
32820 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
32823 \begin_layout Standard
32824 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
32825 class options list in the
32827 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32831 In this document the options
32838 \begin_layout Standard
32839 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32845 \begin_layout Standard
32846 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
32847 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
32852 field in the nomenclature dialog:
32855 \begin_layout Description
32865 \begin_layout Description
32868 nomrefpage Like the
32875 \begin_layout Description
32878 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
32887 \begin_layout Description
32891 \begin_inset space ~
32897 \begin_inset space ~
32902 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
32905 \begin_layout Standard
32907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32914 are automatically translated for most document languages.
32915 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
32919 \begin_layout Standard
32928 \begin_inset Newline newline
32934 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32938 \begin_inset space ~
32950 unskip, see equation
32953 \begin_inset Newline newline
32960 pagedeclaration}[1]{
32961 \begin_inset Newline newline
32967 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
32970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32971 \begin_inset space ~
32988 \begin_layout Standard
32989 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
32992 \begin_inset space ~
32997 in the document settings under
33000 \begin_inset space ~
33008 \begin_layout Standard
33016 \begin_inset Newline newline
33020 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33024 \begin_inset space ~
33036 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
33038 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
33039 \begin_inset Newline newline
33046 pagedeclaration}[1]{
33047 \begin_inset Newline newline
33051 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
33054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33055 \begin_inset space ~
33067 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
33072 \begin_layout Subsection
33073 Printing the Nomenclature
33074 \begin_inset Index idx
33077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33078 Nomenclature ! Printing
33086 \begin_layout Standard
33087 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
33089 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33090 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
33095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33106 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
33107 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
33108 You can choose between these settings:
33111 \begin_layout Description
33112 Default a space of 1
33113 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33119 \begin_layout Description
33121 \begin_inset space ~
33125 \begin_inset space ~
33128 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
33131 \begin_layout Description
33132 Custom custom space
33135 \begin_layout Standard
33136 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
33137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33145 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
33153 For example, in order to change the name to
33157 , add the following line to the preamble:
33160 \begin_layout Standard
33173 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
33176 \begin_layout Standard
33177 When you are using another document language than English, replace
33178 \begin_inset Newline newline
33193 , where *** is the name of the language used.
33196 \begin_layout Subsection
33197 Nomenclature Program
33198 \begin_inset Index idx
33201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33202 Nomenclature ! Program
33208 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33210 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
33217 \begin_layout Standard
33223 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33224 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
33226 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
33231 by adding options, see section
33232 \begin_inset space ~
33236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33238 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33243 The available options are listed and explained in
33244 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33246 key "nomencl,makeindex"
33254 \begin_layout Section
33256 \begin_inset Index idx
33259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33266 \begin_inset Index idx
33269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33270 Document ! Branches
33276 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33278 name "sec:Branches"
33285 \begin_layout Standard
33286 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
33287 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
33288 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
33289 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
33292 \begin_layout Standard
33293 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
33294 allows you to put text into branches.
33295 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
33296 To create a branch, either select the menu
33298 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33299 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
33302 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
33304 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33311 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
33312 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
33313 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
33314 and whether the name of the branch should
33315 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
33316 (see below for an example).
33317 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
33318 to the name of the other) and to add
33319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33327 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33331 \begin_inset space ~
33334 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
33335 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
33338 \begin_layout Standard
33339 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
33340 These boxes are inserted via the menu
33342 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33345 where you can choose a branch.
33346 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
33350 \begin_layout Standard
33351 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
33352 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
33355 \begin_layout Standard
33356 \begin_inset Branch Question
33360 \begin_layout Standard
33365 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
33373 \begin_layout Standard
33374 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33378 \begin_layout Standard
33383 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
33391 \begin_layout Standard
33398 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33399 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33402 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
33403 Consider for example a file
33404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33411 which has the above branches.
33413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33420 is active, the PDF export file would be called
33421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33444 branch were inactive,
33445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33460 branch was active, likewise
33461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33465 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33476 branch was active, and
33477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33480 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
33481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33484 if both branches were active.
33485 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
33486 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33492 \begin_layout Standard
33493 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
33499 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
33500 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
33504 \begin_inset space ~
33512 \begin_layout Standard
33513 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33517 \begin_layout Standard
33523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33530 branch is deactivated.
33536 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
33542 \begin_layout Standard
33543 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
33544 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
33545 definitions for each branch.
33546 For example you can define for the question branch
33550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33551 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33552 -syntax, see section
33553 \begin_inset space ~
33557 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33559 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33571 \begin_layout Standard
33581 \begin_layout Standard
33591 \begin_layout Standard
33592 and for the answer branch
33595 \begin_layout Standard
33605 \begin_layout Standard
33615 \begin_layout Standard
33616 \begin_inset Branch Question
33620 \begin_layout Standard
33624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33652 \begin_layout Standard
33653 \begin_inset Branch Answer
33657 \begin_layout Standard
33661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33689 \begin_layout Standard
33690 Now it is possible to use the
33694 question{\SpecialChar ldots
33701 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
33704 commands to obtain conditional output.
33705 Here is an example formula where only the
33712 \begin_inset Formula
33714 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
33722 \begin_layout Standard
33723 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
33731 \begin_layout Standard
33732 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
33734 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33738 \begin_inset space \space{}
33741 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
33743 For this advanced usage, see the
33749 Flex insets and InsetLayout
33754 \begin_layout Section
33756 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33758 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
33763 \begin_inset Index idx
33766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33775 \begin_layout Standard
33778 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33779 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33782 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
33784 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33790 \begin_inset Index idx
33793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33795 packages ! hyperref
33800 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
33801 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
33802 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
33803 part of the document.
33807 \begin_layout Standard
33808 The header information in the dialog tab
33812 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
33813 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
33814 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
33815 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
33819 \begin_inset space ~
33823 \begin_inset space ~
33828 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
33829 tries to extract the header information from your document title
33830 and author entries.
33834 \begin_inset space ~
33838 \begin_inset space ~
33842 \begin_inset space ~
33847 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
33850 \begin_layout Standard
33851 You can specify in the dialog tab
33855 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
33860 \begin_inset space ~
33864 \begin_inset space ~
33868 \begin_inset space ~
33873 option allows long links to be split;
33876 \begin_inset space ~
33880 \begin_inset space ~
33884 \begin_inset space ~
33892 \begin_inset space ~
33897 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
33900 \begin_inset space ~
33905 colors the different links.
33906 The default colors are:
33909 \begin_layout Labeling
33910 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33915 for hyperlinks and URLs
33918 \begin_layout Labeling
33919 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33927 \begin_layout Labeling
33928 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
33936 \begin_layout Standard
33937 but you can change these in the field
33942 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
33945 \begin_layout Standard
33948 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
33951 \begin_layout Standard
33956 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
33957 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
33958 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
33961 \begin_layout Standard
33966 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
33967 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
33968 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
33978 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
33979 when opening the PDF.
33981 \begin_inset space ~
33984 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
33985 \begin_inset space ~
33988 1 will only display the sections.
33991 \begin_layout Standard
33992 PDF properties are also used in this document.
33993 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
33999 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
34000 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34010 \begin_layout Section
34012 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34014 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34016 name "sec:TeX-Code"
34023 \begin_layout Subsection
34026 \begin_inset Index idx
34029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34037 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34039 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
34046 \begin_layout Standard
34047 As \SpecialChar LyX
34048 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
34049 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
34050 commands and constructs,
34053 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
34054 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
34055 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
34056 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34057 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
34058 cannot support all packages and
34062 \begin_layout Standard
34063 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
34064 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
34065 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
34069 Code box is created by the menu
34071 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34073 \begin_inset space ~
34078 or by the toolbar button
34091 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
34099 \begin_layout Standard
34100 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
34102 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
34104 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
34108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34109 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
34114 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34121 , you can write the command part
34127 in a \SpecialChar TeX
34128 Code box before the word and the closing brace
34132 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
34133 Code box behind the word.
34134 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
34135 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
34139 \begin_layout Standard
34140 \begin_inset Graphics
34141 filename clipart/ERT.png
34149 \begin_layout Standard
34153 \begin_layout Standard
34154 This is a line with a
34158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34181 \begin_layout Standard
34182 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34190 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34191 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
34192 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
34193 know that the command is finished.
34201 \begin_layout Subsection
34202 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34204 \begin_inset Argument 1
34207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34208 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34215 \begin_inset Index idx
34218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34226 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34228 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34235 \begin_layout Standard
34236 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
34237 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34238 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
34239 uses in the background.
34240 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
34241 is based on commands, you can
34242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34250 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
34251 any time if you know the right commands.
34252 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
34253 is the end of the day.
34254 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
34255 all caption labels bold.
34256 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
34258 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
34262 \begin_layout Standard
34263 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
34265 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34267 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34270 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34280 \begin_layout Standard
34281 As result you find that the package
34286 \begin_inset Index idx
34289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34297 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
34299 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34302 \SpecialChar menuseparator
34306 \begin_inset space ~
34314 \begin_layout Standard
34319 usepackage[options]{package name}
34322 \begin_layout Standard
34323 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
34324 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
34325 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
34326 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
34329 \begin_layout Standard
34330 In your case the package name is
34335 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
34340 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
34341 So you add the command
34344 \begin_layout Standard
34349 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
34352 \begin_layout Standard
34353 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
34357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34358 For more commands provided by the
34362 package, have a look at its documentation,
34363 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34378 \begin_layout Standard
34379 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
34381 For example if you use a
34385 class, you don't need the package
34389 , you can instead write
34392 \begin_layout Standard
34397 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
34402 \begin_layout Standard
34403 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
34404 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
34405 documentation of the document class you want to use.
34412 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
34415 \begin_layout Standard
34416 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
34417 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
34419 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34420 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
34421 Code box as described in the previous
34425 \begin_layout Standard
34426 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
34427 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34430 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34432 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
34440 \begin_layout Standard
34441 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34447 \begin_layout Standard
34451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34461 \begin_inset Note Note
34464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34465 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
34473 \begin_layout Left Header
34474 \begin_inset Argument 1
34477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34497 \begin_inset Note Note
34500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34501 defines the header line as described below
34509 \begin_layout Center Header
34510 \begin_inset Argument 1
34513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34522 \begin_layout Right Header
34523 \begin_inset Argument 1
34526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34547 \begin_layout Left Footer
34548 \begin_inset Argument 1
34551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34572 \begin_layout Center Footer
34573 \begin_inset Argument 1
34576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34588 \begin_inset Newline newline
34592 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34598 \begin_layout Right Footer
34599 \begin_inset Argument 1
34602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34624 \begin_layout Section
34625 Customized Page Headers and Footers
34626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34628 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
34633 \begin_inset Index idx
34636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34637 Document ! Header/Footer line
34643 \begin_inset Index idx
34646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34655 \begin_layout Standard
34656 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
34660 \begin_inset space ~
34671 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34677 \begin_inset space ~
34683 As a second step add in the menu
34685 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34686 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34695 Custom Header/Footerlines
34698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34702 This module offers the following 6
34703 \begin_inset space ~
34709 \begin_layout Description
34711 \begin_inset space ~
34715 \begin_inset space ~
34719 \begin_inset space ~
34723 \begin_inset space ~
34727 \begin_inset space ~
34733 \begin_layout Description
34735 \begin_inset space ~
34739 \begin_inset space ~
34743 \begin_inset space ~
34747 \begin_inset space ~
34751 \begin_inset space ~
34757 \begin_layout Standard
34758 for the different positions in the header/footer.
34759 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
34762 \begin_layout Standard
34763 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
34764 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
34766 \begin_inset space ~
34770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34772 reference "fig:Page-layout"
34776 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
34779 \begin_layout Standard
34780 \begin_inset Float figure
34787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34790 \begin_inset Tabular
34791 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
34792 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
34793 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34794 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34795 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
34797 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
34809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34815 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34826 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34844 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34855 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
34858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34859 The normal text on the page goes here.
34860 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
34862 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
34863 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
34868 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34877 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34888 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34906 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34917 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
34920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
34929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34935 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
34938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34953 \begin_inset Caption Standard
34955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34956 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34958 name "fig:Page-layout"
34962 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
34975 \begin_layout Standard
34976 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34984 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
34988 \begin_inset space ~
34993 is set to “Default”.
34994 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
35003 \begin_layout Subsection
35007 \begin_layout Standard
35008 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
35009 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
35010 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
35011 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
35013 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
35015 Defining the footer line works similarly.
35018 \begin_layout Standard
35019 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
35020 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
35024 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35026 \begin_inset space ~
35034 \begin_layout Description
35037 thepage prints the current page number
35040 \begin_layout Description
35043 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
35046 \begin_layout Description
35049 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
35052 \begin_layout Description
35055 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
35056 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
35059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35063 \begin_inset Quotes prd
35066 because it usually goes in a left header.
35069 \begin_layout Description
35072 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
35073 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
35075 It is normally used in the right header.
35078 \begin_layout Subsection
35079 Default header/footer
35082 \begin_layout Standard
35083 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
35084 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
35085 footer has the page number.
35086 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
35087 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
35088 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
35091 \begin_inset space ~
35099 \begin_layout Subsection
35103 \begin_layout Standard
35104 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
35105 Some pages are different.
35106 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
35107 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
35108 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
35109 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
35110 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
35113 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35114 Header and footer decoration line
35117 \begin_layout Standard
35118 By default, you get a 0.4
35119 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35122 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
35123 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
35135 in the following way:
35138 \begin_layout Standard
35145 headrulewidth}{thickness}
35148 \begin_layout Standard
35149 where thickness is a size in standard units like
35162 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
35163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35169 \begin_layout Standard
35170 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35172 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
35173 \begin_inset space ~
35177 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35187 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35188 Several header/footer lines
35191 \begin_layout Standard
35192 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
35193 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
35194 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
35196 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35211 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35212 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35214 \begin_inset space ~
35222 \begin_layout Standard
35229 headheight}{height}
35232 \begin_layout Standard
35237 is a size in standard units (e.
35238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35242 \begin_inset space \space{}
35250 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
35251 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
35252 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35253 logfile with the menu
35255 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35257 \begin_inset space ~
35265 \begin_inset space ~
35270 to see if you can find a warning about the package
35275 \begin_inset Index idx
35278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35280 packages ! fancyhdr
35286 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
35287 for your header/footer.
35290 \begin_layout Subsection
35294 \begin_layout Standard
35295 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
35296 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
35297 This example consists of the following definition:
35300 \begin_layout Description
35302 \begin_inset space ~
35311 , empty optional argument
35314 \begin_layout Description
35316 \begin_inset space ~
35319 Header empty, empty optional argument
35322 \begin_layout Description
35324 \begin_inset space ~
35333 in the optional argument
35336 \begin_layout Description
35338 \begin_inset space ~
35347 in the optional argument
35350 \begin_layout Description
35352 \begin_inset space ~
35365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35369 \begin_inset Newline newline
35373 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35380 in the optional argument
35383 \begin_layout Description
35385 \begin_inset space ~
35394 , empty optional argument
35397 \begin_layout Description
35400 headrulewidth set to 2
35401 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35407 \begin_layout Standard
35408 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
35409 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
35415 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35425 \begin_layout Standard
35426 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35432 \begin_layout Standard
35436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35440 pagestyle{headings}
35446 \begin_inset Note Note
35449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35450 switches back to page style with the default headings
35458 \begin_layout Section
35459 Previewing Snippets of your Document
35460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35462 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35467 \begin_inset Index idx
35470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35477 \begin_inset Index idx
35480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35489 \begin_layout Standard
35491 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
35492 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
35493 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
35496 \begin_layout Subsection
35500 \begin_layout Standard
35501 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35507 \begin_inset Index idx
35510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35512 packages ! preview-latex
35517 (on some systems named simply
35522 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
35524 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35531 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35533 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
35541 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
35542 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35543 -package are automatically
35544 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
35548 \begin_layout Subsection
35552 \begin_layout Standard
35553 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35554 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35556 activate the option
35559 \begin_inset space ~
35566 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35572 \begin_inset space ~
35576 \begin_inset space ~
35579 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
35586 \begin_inset space ~
35599 \begin_inset space ~
35604 is the multiplication factor for the size.
35607 \begin_layout Standard
35608 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
35613 \begin_inset space ~
35621 \begin_inset space ~
35629 \begin_layout Standard
35630 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
35631 and when you finish
35635 \begin_layout Standard
35636 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35644 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
35645 generated by activating the option
35648 \begin_inset space ~
35654 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
35662 \begin_layout Subsection
35663 Selected document parts
35666 \begin_layout Standard
35667 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
35668 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
35669 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
35670 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35672 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
35674 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35678 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
35679 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
35680 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
35683 \begin_layout Standard
35684 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35691 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35703 is explained in section
35705 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
35710 \begin_inset space ~
35720 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
35721 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
35722 the final rotated boxes,
35723 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
35724 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
35726 Here is the result:
35729 \begin_layout Standard
35730 \begin_inset Preview
35732 \begin_layout Standard
35737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35741 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
35747 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
35757 height_special "totalheight"
35762 backgroundcolor "none"
35765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35790 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
35796 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
35803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35818 \begin_layout Standard
35819 Previewing works also for colors.
35820 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35839 is explained in section
35846 \begin_inset space ~
35859 \begin_layout Standard
35860 \begin_inset Preview
35862 \begin_layout Standard
35866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35885 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
35890 This is text within a colored, framed box.
35894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35909 \begin_layout Standard
35910 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
35916 \begin_layout Standard
35917 If \SpecialChar LyX
35918 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
35919 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
35920 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
35921 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35922 packages in your document preamble that are required by
35923 the \SpecialChar TeX
35925 If \SpecialChar LyX
35926 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
35927 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
35929 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
35930 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
35931 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
35934 \begin_layout Subsection
35939 \begin_layout Standard
35940 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35941 source of the whole document or parts of it.
35944 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
35946 \begin_inset space ~
35951 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35953 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
35955 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
35956 's main window, then only this selection
35957 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
35958 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
35959 the source view window.
35964 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
35965 ; but note that if you have
35966 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
35968 not just the one which is open at the time.
35971 \begin_layout Section
35972 Advanced Find and Replace
35973 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35975 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35980 \begin_inset Index idx
35983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35990 \begin_inset Index idx
35993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36002 \begin_layout Subsection
36006 \begin_layout Standard
36007 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
36008 allows for searching of complex,
36009 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
36011 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
36012 The key-features are:
36015 \begin_layout Itemize
36016 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
36017 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
36018 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
36022 \begin_layout Itemize
36023 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
36024 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
36025 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
36026 a section heading will only be found within section headings
36029 \begin_layout Itemize
36030 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
36031 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
36032 outside of mathematics environments
36035 \begin_layout Itemize
36036 Search may be widened to a specific
36041 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36045 \begin_inset space ~
36048 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
36049 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
36056 \begin_layout Itemize
36057 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
36058 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
36059 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36063 \begin_inset space ~
36066 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
36069 \begin_layout Subsection
36073 \begin_layout Standard
36074 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
36076 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
36089 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
36092 ) or the toolbar button
36095 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
36101 Advanced Find and Replace
36106 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36110 \begin_layout Standard
36116 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
36120 \begin_inset space ~
36125 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
36128 arg "paragraph-break"
36132 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
36133 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
36137 arg "paragraph-break"
36140 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
36144 searches backwards.
36147 \begin_layout Standard
36151 \begin_inset space ~
36156 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
36165 \begin_inset space ~
36170 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
36173 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36174 Searching for mathematics
36177 \begin_layout Standard
36178 Mathematical formulas, such as
36179 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
36182 or something more complex like
36183 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
36186 , may be searched for by typing them in the
36191 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
36192 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
36193 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
36194 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
36200 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36204 \begin_layout Standard
36205 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
36206 This is done by switching to the
36210 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
36215 This way, entering in the
36222 \begin_layout Itemize
36223 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
36224 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
36227 \begin_layout Itemize
36228 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
36229 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
36232 \begin_layout Itemize
36233 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
36234 of it only within section headings.
36235 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
36236 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
36240 \begin_layout Itemize
36241 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
36242 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
36245 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36249 \begin_layout Standard
36250 The entries made in the
36254 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
36257 \begin_inset space ~
36263 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
36267 button or alternatively press
36270 arg "paragraph-break"
36277 while the cursor is in the
36280 \begin_inset space ~
36288 \begin_layout Standard
36289 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
36291 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
36295 \begin_layout Itemize
36296 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
36297 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
36298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36305 with its typewriter version
36306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36320 \begin_layout Itemize
36321 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
36323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36327 \begin_inset Formula $R$
36331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36339 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
36343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36346 (you may want to enable the
36349 \begin_inset space ~
36357 \begin_inset space ~
36362 options and disable the
36370 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
36371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36378 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
36379 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
36383 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
36386 , or occurrences of
36387 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
36391 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
36397 \begin_layout Subsection
36401 \begin_layout Standard
36402 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
36406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36407 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
36409 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36411 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
36421 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
36427 This is done with the context menu
36429 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36430 Insert Regular Expression
36432 while the cursor is in the
36437 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
36438 expression matching rules
36442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36443 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
36446 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36450 \begin_inset space ~
36453 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
36454 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
36460 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
36461 same text in the document.
36462 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
36463 Examples of using such a feature may be:
36466 \begin_layout Enumerate
36467 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
36472 editor the fraction
36473 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
36477 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36480 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
36481 fractions with the given denominator.
36484 \begin_layout Enumerate
36485 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
36497 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36502 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
36503 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
36504 Also, by inserting a
36505 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
36508 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
36509 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
36512 \begin_layout Standard
36513 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
36514 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
36515 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36518 , and referring back to them through
36519 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36523 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
36527 For example, try searching with the regexp
36528 \begin_inset Newline newline
36531 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
36534 \begin_inset Newline newline
36537 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
36540 \begin_layout Standard
36541 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
36544 \begin_layout Standard
36545 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36553 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
36554 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
36555 sub-expressions is absolute.
36557 \begin_inset space ~
36561 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
36564 always refers to the first occurrence of
36565 \begin_inset Formula $()$
36568 in all entered regexps.
36576 \begin_layout Section
36578 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36580 name "sec:Spellchecking"
36585 \begin_inset Index idx
36588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36597 \begin_layout Standard
36599 has a built-in spell checker.
36602 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36609 key or the toolbar button
36612 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
36615 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
36616 beginning of the currently selected text.
36617 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
36618 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
36619 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
36620 scrolled so that it is visible.
36621 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
36622 n, if any could be found.
36623 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
36627 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
36628 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
36631 \begin_layout Standard
36632 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
36635 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36639 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
36640 a different one at the top of the dialog.
36642 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
36643 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
36646 \begin_inset space ~
36654 arg "dialog-show character"
36657 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
36659 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
36662 \begin_layout Standard
36663 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36664 can be downloaded from here:
36665 \begin_inset Newline newline
36669 \begin_inset Flex URL
36672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36674 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
36680 \begin_inset Newline newline
36684 \begin_inset space ~
36687 files for each language.
36688 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
36689 \begin_inset space ~
36692 files into \SpecialChar LyX
36693 's installation subfolder
36701 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
36703 \begin_inset Newline newline
36706 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
36707 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
36708 but in most cases these are
36724 is the language code.
36727 \begin_layout Subsection
36731 \begin_layout Standard
36734 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36735 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36737 \begin_inset space ~
36740 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36743 you can set the following things:
36746 \begin_layout Description
36748 \begin_inset space ~
36751 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
36752 should use for spell checking.
36753 Depending on your platform,
36763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36764 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
36765 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
36780 \begin_inset space ~
36783 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
36786 \begin_layout Description
36788 \begin_inset space ~
36791 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
36792 will always use the given language
36793 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
36796 \begin_layout Description
36798 \begin_inset space ~
36801 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
36803 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36807 \begin_inset space \space{}
36811 This should normally not be needed.
36814 \begin_layout Description
36816 \begin_inset space ~
36820 \begin_inset space ~
36823 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
36825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36835 \begin_layout Description
36837 \begin_inset space ~
36840 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
36841 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
36842 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
36843 appear in a context menu.
36844 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
36848 \begin_layout Description
36850 \begin_inset space ~
36854 \begin_inset space ~
36858 \begin_inset space ~
36861 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
36865 \begin_layout Section
36867 \begin_inset Index idx
36870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36877 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36879 name "sec:Thesaurus"
36886 \begin_layout Standard
36888 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
36889 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
36898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36899 \begin_inset CommandInset href
36901 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
36911 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
36913 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
36914 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
36915 which are available for many languages.
36918 \begin_layout Standard
36919 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
36920 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
36924 \begin_layout Subsection
36925 Setting up the thesaurus
36928 \begin_layout Standard
36937 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
36941 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
36946 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
36948 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36952 \begin_inset space ~
36960 For instance, the US English files are named:
36963 \begin_layout Itemize
36967 \begin_layout Itemize
36971 \begin_layout Standard
36980 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
36981 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
36984 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36985 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36986 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36988 \begin_inset space ~
36993 ) to the path where they are installed.
36997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36998 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
36999 ies, typical locations are
37005 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
37009 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
37013 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
37016 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
37022 LibreOffice-<Version>
37029 On the Mac, the default location is
37031 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
37032 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37033 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
37034 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
37035 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37036 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
37044 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
37045 during the \SpecialChar LyX
37046 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
37050 \begin_layout Standard
37051 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
37052 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
37054 \begin_inset Newline newline
37058 \begin_inset Flex URL
37061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37063 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
37071 \begin_layout Standard
37072 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
37073 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
37075 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37076 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37077 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37079 \begin_inset space ~
37084 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
37086 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
37087 and point \SpecialChar LyX
37091 \begin_layout Standard
37092 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
37094 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
37097 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
37103 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
37106 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
37107 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
37109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37115 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37116 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37117 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
37119 \begin_inset space ~
37124 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
37127 \begin_layout Subsection
37128 Using the thesaurus
37131 \begin_layout Standard
37132 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
37134 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37137 or the toolbar button
37140 arg "thesaurus-entry"
37143 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
37145 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
37147 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
37148 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
37149 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
37158 ), related terms (such as
37161 \begin_inset space ~
37170 ), compounds (such as
37173 \begin_inset space ~
37182 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
37191 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
37194 \begin_layout Standard
37195 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
37196 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
37200 \begin_layout Standard
37201 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
37202 the dictionary, such as the above
37206 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
37207 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37211 \begin_inset space \space{}
37214 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
37215 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
37216 For example, looking up the word form
37220 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
37225 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
37226 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37230 \begin_inset space \space{}
37241 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
37242 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
37243 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
37246 \begin_layout Section
37248 \begin_inset Index idx
37251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37258 \begin_inset Index idx
37261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37262 Document ! Change Tracking
37268 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37270 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
37277 \begin_layout Standard
37278 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
37279 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
37280 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
37281 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
37283 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37285 \begin_inset space ~
37288 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37290 \begin_inset space ~
37298 \begin_layout Standard
37299 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
37313 The color depends on the author that made the change.
37314 You can change the color in
37316 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37317 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37319 \begin_inset space ~
37323 \begin_inset space ~
37328 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37334 \begin_inset Index idx
37337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37338 Color ! Change tracking
37343 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
37344 's status bar when the
37345 cursor is in changed text.
37346 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
37349 arg "changes-merge"
37355 \begin_layout Standard
37356 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
37358 \begin_inset Index idx
37361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37370 \begin_layout Standard
37371 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37377 \begin_layout Standard
37378 \begin_inset Graphics
37379 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
37387 \begin_layout Standard
37388 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37394 \begin_layout Standard
37395 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
37398 \begin_layout Standard
37399 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37405 \begin_layout Standard
37406 \begin_inset Tabular
37407 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
37408 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
37409 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37410 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
37411 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37420 arg "changes-track"
37428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37434 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37436 \begin_inset space ~
37439 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37441 \begin_inset space ~
37450 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37459 arg "changes-output"
37467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37473 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37475 \begin_inset space ~
37478 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37480 \begin_inset space ~
37484 \begin_inset space ~
37488 \begin_inset space ~
37497 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37518 Jumps to the next change
37524 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37533 arg "change-accept"
37541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37547 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37549 \begin_inset space ~
37552 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37554 \begin_inset space ~
37563 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37572 arg "change-reject"
37580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37586 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37588 \begin_inset space ~
37591 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37593 \begin_inset space ~
37602 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37611 arg "changes-merge"
37619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37625 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37627 \begin_inset space ~
37630 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37632 \begin_inset space ~
37641 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37650 arg "all-changes-accept"
37658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37664 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37666 \begin_inset space ~
37669 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37671 \begin_inset space ~
37675 \begin_inset space ~
37684 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37693 arg "all-changes-reject"
37701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37707 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37709 \begin_inset space ~
37712 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
37714 \begin_inset space ~
37718 \begin_inset space ~
37727 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37750 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37751 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
37753 \begin_inset space ~
37762 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
37763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37785 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
37787 \begin_inset space ~
37803 \begin_layout Standard
37804 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
37810 \begin_layout Standard
37811 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
37831 \begin_layout Standard
37832 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
37833 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
37834 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
37835 the next change after the current cursor position.
37836 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
37837 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
37838 step to the next change.
37839 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
37842 \begin_layout Standard
37843 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
37844 to describe a change.
37847 \begin_layout Standard
37848 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37854 \begin_inset Index idx
37857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37865 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
37867 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37874 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37878 \begin_layout Section
37879 Comparison of Documents
37880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37882 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
37887 \begin_inset Index idx
37890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37891 Comparison of documents
37899 \begin_layout Standard
37900 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
37903 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37907 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
37908 file with change tracking enabled showing the
37910 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
37912 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
37916 \begin_inset space ~
37920 \begin_inset space ~
37924 \begin_inset space ~
37933 \begin_inset space ~
37937 \begin_inset space ~
37941 \begin_inset space ~
37945 \begin_inset space ~
37949 \begin_inset space ~
37953 \begin_inset space ~
37958 enables the change tracking option
37961 \begin_inset space ~
37965 \begin_inset space ~
37969 \begin_inset space ~
37974 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
37977 \begin_layout Section
37978 International Support
37979 \begin_inset Index idx
37982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37983 International support
37991 \begin_layout Standard
37992 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
37993 with any language you want.
37994 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
37995 up \SpecialChar LyX
37997 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37999 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
38007 \begin_layout Standard
38008 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
38009 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
38010 \begin_inset space ~
38014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38016 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
38023 \begin_layout Subsection
38025 \begin_inset Index idx
38028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38035 \begin_inset Index idx
38038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38039 Document ! Settings
38045 \begin_inset Index idx
38048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38049 Document ! Language
38057 \begin_layout Standard
38060 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38061 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38064 dialog lets you set
38066 the language, the quote style and character encoding
38071 \begin_layout Standard
38076 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38081 \begin_inset space ~
38086 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
38087 For details about the different encoding options see section
38088 \begin_inset space ~
38092 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38094 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
38101 \begin_layout Subsection
38102 Keyboard mapping configuration
38103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38105 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
38112 \begin_layout Standard
38113 If you have for example a U.
38114 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38117 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
38118 can use an alternate keymap.
38119 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
38124 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38125 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38126 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
38129 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
38130 \begin_inset space ~
38134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38136 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
38141 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
38142 which one you want to use.
38145 \begin_layout Standard
38146 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
38147 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
38148 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
38149 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38152 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
38153 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
38154 one to support the characters you want.
38155 This and many other customizations are explained in the
38162 \begin_layout Chapter
38165 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38167 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
38174 \begin_layout Standard
38175 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
38176 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
38177 topic inside the user's guide.
38180 \begin_layout Section
38182 \begin_inset Index idx
38185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38194 \begin_layout Standard
38199 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
38202 \begin_layout Subsection
38206 \begin_layout Standard
38207 Creates a new document.
38210 \begin_layout Subsection
38214 \begin_layout Standard
38215 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
38216 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
38217 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
38220 \begin_layout Subsection
38224 \begin_layout Standard
38228 \begin_layout Subsection
38232 \begin_layout Standard
38233 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
38234 Click there on a file to open it.
38237 \begin_layout Subsection
38241 \begin_layout Standard
38242 Closes the current document.
38245 \begin_layout Subsection
38249 \begin_layout Standard
38250 Closes all opened documents.
38253 \begin_layout Subsection
38257 \begin_layout Standard
38258 Saves the actual document.
38261 \begin_layout Subsection
38265 \begin_layout Standard
38266 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
38269 \begin_layout Subsection
38273 \begin_layout Standard
38274 Saves all opened documents.
38277 \begin_layout Subsection
38281 \begin_layout Standard
38282 Reloads the actual document from disk.
38285 \begin_layout Subsection
38289 \begin_layout Standard
38290 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
38291 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
38292 It is described in the section
38294 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
38299 Additional Features
38304 \begin_layout Subsection
38308 \begin_layout Standard
38309 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
38310 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
38312 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
38313 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
38317 \begin_layout Standard
38318 When using the menu entry
38321 \begin_inset space ~
38326 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
38330 \begin_inset space ~
38334 \begin_inset space ~
38338 \begin_inset space ~
38343 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
38344 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
38347 \begin_layout Subsection
38349 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38351 name "subsec:Export"
38358 \begin_layout Standard
38359 You can export your document to various file formats.
38360 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
38362 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
38363 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
38364 during its configuration.
38367 \begin_layout Standard
38368 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
38370 \begin_inset space ~
38374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38376 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
38383 \begin_layout Description
38389 \begin_inset space ~
38392 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
38394 \begin_inset space ~
38397 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
38398 \begin_inset Newline newline
38401 Since \SpecialChar LyX
38402 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
38406 \begin_layout Description
38407 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
38413 \begin_layout Description
38415 \begin_inset space ~
38418 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
38424 \begin_layout Description
38425 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
38426 's native DVI-format.
38427 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
38428 files paths or file names in your document.
38430 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
38437 \begin_layout Description
38438 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
38439 in files paths or file names
38442 \begin_layout Description
38444 \begin_inset space ~
38451 ) DVI-format using the program
38453 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38456 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
38460 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38468 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
38476 \begin_layout Description
38478 \begin_inset space ~
38481 (cropped) the same as
38485 but with cropped page margins.
38488 \begin_layout Description
38490 \begin_inset space ~
38493 Dot text file with code in the programming language
38497 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
38502 \begin_layout Description
38506 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38514 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
38522 \begin_layout Description
38524 \begin_inset space ~
38528 \begin_inset space ~
38531 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
38535 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
38543 \begin_layout Description
38547 \begin_inset space ~
38556 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38557 source that is compilable with the program
38559 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38563 \begin_layout Description
38567 \begin_inset space ~
38572 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38573 source, additionally all images used in the document
38574 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
38578 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
38581 \begin_layout Description
38585 \begin_inset space ~
38590 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38591 source code, additionally all images used in the document
38592 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
38600 \begin_layout Description
38604 \begin_inset space ~
38613 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38614 source that is compilable with the program
38620 \begin_layout Description
38622 \begin_inset space ~
38626 \begin_inset space ~
38633 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38634 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
38640 \begin_layout Description
38642 \begin_inset space ~
38645 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
38646 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
38648 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38652 \begin_inset space \space{}
38657 \begin_inset space ~
38661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38676 represent the version number)
38679 \begin_layout Description
38681 \begin_inset space ~
38685 \begin_inset space ~
38688 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
38689 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
38690 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
38694 \begin_layout Description
38695 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
38696 's internal XHTML engine
38699 \begin_layout Description
38701 \begin_inset space ~
38705 \begin_inset space ~
38709 \begin_inset space ~
38713 \begin_inset space ~
38716 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
38721 For the conversion the program
38730 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38733 \begin_layout Description
38734 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
38739 \begin_layout Description
38741 \begin_inset space ~
38744 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
38746 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
38749 For the conversion the program
38758 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38761 \begin_layout Description
38763 \begin_inset space ~
38766 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
38767 For the conversion the program
38776 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
38779 \begin_layout Description
38781 \begin_inset space ~
38784 (cropped) the same as
38787 \begin_inset space ~
38792 but with cropped page margins
38795 \begin_layout Description
38799 \begin_inset space ~
38804 PDF-format using the program
38808 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
38811 \begin_layout Description
38815 \begin_inset space ~
38819 \begin_inset space ~
38827 \begin_inset space ~
38832 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
38833 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38837 \begin_inset space \space{}
38840 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
38844 \begin_layout Description
38848 \begin_inset space ~
38853 PDF-format using the program
38855 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
38858 , produces PDF-files directly
38861 \begin_layout Description
38865 \begin_inset space ~
38870 PDF-format using the program
38874 , produces PDF-files directly
38877 \begin_layout Description
38881 \begin_inset space ~
38886 PDF-format using the program
38890 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
38893 \begin_layout Description
38897 \begin_inset space ~
38902 PDF-format using the program
38907 , produces PDF-files directly
38910 \begin_layout Description
38914 \begin_inset space ~
38922 \begin_layout Description
38926 \begin_inset space ~
38930 \begin_inset space ~
38935 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
38936 and then exported as text using the program
38941 \begin_layout Description
38946 PostScript format using the program
38954 options see section
38955 \begin_inset space ~
38959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38961 reference "subsec:General-output"
38968 \begin_layout Description
38969 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38970 source and also code in the statistical programming
38984 it is possible to use
38988 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
38992 \begin_layout Standard
38993 If one of the menu entries
39000 \begin_inset space ~
39009 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39011 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39013 \begin_inset space ~
39017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39019 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39024 \begin_inset Index idx
39027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39028 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39037 \begin_layout Subsection
39041 \begin_layout Standard
39042 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
39043 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
39046 \begin_inset space ~
39050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39052 reference "sec:Paths"
39057 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
39066 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
39067 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
39068 's preferences as described in section
39069 \begin_inset space ~
39073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39075 reference "subsec:Converters"
39082 \begin_layout Subsection
39083 New and Close Window
39086 \begin_layout Standard
39087 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
39091 \begin_layout Subsection
39095 \begin_layout Standard
39096 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
39099 \begin_layout Section
39101 \begin_inset Index idx
39104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39113 \begin_layout Subsection
39117 \begin_layout Standard
39118 Described in section
39119 \begin_inset space ~
39123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39125 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
39132 \begin_layout Subsection
39133 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
39136 \begin_layout Standard
39137 Described in section
39138 \begin_inset space ~
39142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39144 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39151 \begin_layout Subsection
39155 \begin_layout Standard
39156 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
39157 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
39160 \begin_layout Subsection
39164 \begin_layout Standard
39165 Selects the whole document.
39168 \begin_layout Subsection
39169 Find & Replace (Quick)
39172 \begin_layout Standard
39173 Described in section
39174 \begin_inset space ~
39178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39180 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
39187 \begin_layout Subsection
39188 Find & Replace (Advanced)
39191 \begin_layout Standard
39192 Described in section
39193 \begin_inset space ~
39197 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39199 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
39206 \begin_layout Subsection
39207 Move Paragraph Up/Down
39210 \begin_layout Standard
39211 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
39215 \begin_layout Subsection
39217 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39221 \begin_layout Standard
39223 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
39224 Described in section
39225 \begin_inset space ~
39229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39231 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39240 \begin_layout Subsection
39242 \begin_inset Index idx
39245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39246 Paragraph ! Settings
39254 \begin_layout Standard
39255 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
39256 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
39260 \begin_layout Standard
39261 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
39262 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
39268 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39269 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39271 \begin_inset space ~
39277 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
39281 \begin_layout Subsection
39283 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
39287 \begin_layout Standard
39289 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39290 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
39295 \begin_layout Enumerate
39297 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
39298 Customize text properties by means of the
39304 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
39307 ; this is described in section
39308 \begin_inset space ~
39312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39314 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
39321 \begin_layout Enumerate
39323 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
39324 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
39326 Apply last settings
39329 \begin_layout Enumerate
39331 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
39332 Change the casing of selected text (
39347 \begin_layout Subsection
39349 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
39353 \begin_layout Standard
39355 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
39356 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
39357 text styles (in the case of this document:
39379 \begin_inset space ~
39383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39385 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
39394 \begin_layout Subsection
39395 Table and Rows & Columns
39398 \begin_layout Standard
39399 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
39400 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
39401 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
39404 \begin_layout Subsection
39408 \begin_layout Standard
39409 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
39410 It will dissolve this inset.
39411 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
39415 \begin_layout Subsection
39419 \begin_layout Standard
39420 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
39421 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
39424 \begin_layout Subsection
39425 Increase/Decrease List Depth
39428 \begin_layout Standard
39429 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
39431 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
39432 \begin_inset space ~
39436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39438 reference "sec:Nesting"
39443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39445 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
39452 \begin_layout Section
39454 \begin_inset Index idx
39457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39466 \begin_layout Standard
39467 At the bottom of the
39471 menu the opened documents are listed.
39474 \begin_layout Subsection
39475 Open/Close all Insets
39478 \begin_layout Standard
39479 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
39482 \begin_layout Subsection
39483 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
39486 \begin_layout Standard
39487 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
39490 \begin_layout Standard
39491 Math macros are described in the
39498 \begin_layout Subsection
39502 \begin_layout Standard
39503 Shows the outline window as described in sections
39504 \begin_inset space ~
39508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39510 reference "sec:Navigating"
39515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39517 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
39524 \begin_layout Subsection
39528 \begin_layout Standard
39529 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
39531 \begin_inset space ~
39535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39537 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39544 \begin_layout Subsection
39548 \begin_layout Standard
39549 Opens a window showing console messages.
39550 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
39552 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39555 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
39556 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
39557 is processing the document.
39560 \begin_layout Subsection
39562 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39564 name "subsec:Toolbars"
39569 \begin_inset Index idx
39572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39581 \begin_layout Standard
39582 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
39584 All toolbars and the
39587 \begin_inset space ~
39592 can be turned on and off.
39597 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
39609 \begin_inset space ~
39621 \begin_inset space ~
39626 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
39630 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
39637 \begin_layout Standard
39642 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
39646 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
39647 or when a certain feature is enabled.
39648 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
39649 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
39650 is inside a formula or table respectively.
39653 \begin_layout Standard
39655 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
39656 \begin_inset space ~
39660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39662 reference "sec:Toolbars"
39669 \begin_layout Subsection
39673 \begin_layout Standard
39677 \begin_inset space ~
39681 \begin_inset space ~
39685 \begin_inset space ~
39689 \begin_inset space ~
39693 \begin_inset space ~
39697 \begin_inset space ~
39702 will split \SpecialChar LyX
39703 's main window vertically while
39706 \begin_inset space ~
39710 \begin_inset space ~
39714 \begin_inset space ~
39718 \begin_inset space ~
39722 \begin_inset space ~
39726 \begin_inset space ~
39731 will split it horizontally.
39732 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
39733 to view the same document, but at different positions.
39734 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
39735 three or more documents at the same time.
39736 To close a split view, use the menu
39739 \begin_inset space ~
39743 \begin_inset space ~
39751 \begin_layout Subsection
39755 \begin_layout Standard
39756 Closes a split view.
39759 \begin_layout Subsection
39763 \begin_layout Standard
39764 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
39765 so that you will see nothing but your text.
39766 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
39767 's main window fullscreen.
39768 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
39769 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
39772 \begin_layout Section
39774 \begin_inset Index idx
39777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39786 \begin_layout Subsection
39790 \begin_layout Standard
39791 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
39792 \begin_inset space ~
39796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39798 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
39809 \begin_layout Subsection
39811 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39813 name "subsec:Special-Character"
39820 \begin_layout Standard
39821 Here you can insert the following characters:
39824 \begin_layout Description
39829 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
39832 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
39833 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39834 -packages you have installed.
39835 You can get a complete display by checking
39838 \begin_inset space ~
39844 \begin_inset Newline newline
39848 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39856 Not all characters will be visible in the
39860 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
39861 dialog (see section
39862 \begin_inset space ~
39866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39868 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
39872 ) can display every character.
39880 \begin_layout Description
39881 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
39885 \begin_layout Description
39887 \begin_inset space ~
39891 \begin_inset space ~
39894 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
39895 \begin_inset space ~
39899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39901 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
39908 \begin_layout Description
39910 \begin_inset space ~
39913 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
39916 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39917 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39923 \begin_layout Description
39925 \begin_inset space ~
39928 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
39931 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39932 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39938 \begin_layout Description
39940 \begin_inset space ~
39943 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
39947 \begin_layout Description
39949 \begin_inset space ~
39952 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
39956 \begin_layout Description
39958 \begin_inset space ~
39961 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
39967 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
39973 \begin_layout Description
39975 \begin_inset space ~
39978 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
39982 \begin_layout Description
39984 \begin_inset space ~
39988 \begin_inset Index idx
39991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39998 \begin_inset Index idx
40001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40002 Language ! Phonetic symbols
40007 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
40008 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
40010 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40016 \begin_inset Index idx
40019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40027 \begin_inset Newline newline
40030 More information about this feature can be found in the
40036 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
40042 \begin_layout Description
40043 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
40045 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
40046 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
40050 \begin_layout Subsection
40054 \begin_layout Standard
40055 Opens a submenu with the following options:
40058 \begin_layout Description
40059 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
40060 \begin_inset script superscript
40062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40071 \begin_layout Description
40072 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
40073 \begin_inset script subscript
40075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40084 \begin_layout Description
40086 \begin_inset space ~
40089 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
40090 \begin_inset space ~
40094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40096 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
40103 \begin_layout Description
40105 \begin_inset space ~
40108 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
40109 \begin_inset space ~
40113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40115 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
40122 \begin_layout Description
40124 \begin_inset space ~
40127 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
40128 \begin_inset space ~
40132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40134 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
40141 \begin_layout Description
40143 \begin_inset space ~
40146 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
40148 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40152 \begin_inset space \space{}
40155 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
40156 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
40162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40165 To insert a fraction use the command
40170 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
40174 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
40180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40183 The visible space is hereby the character before the
40190 \begin_layout Description
40192 \begin_inset space ~
40195 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
40196 \begin_inset space ~
40200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40202 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
40209 \begin_layout Description
40211 \begin_inset space ~
40214 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
40215 \begin_inset space ~
40219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40221 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
40228 \begin_layout Description
40230 \begin_inset space ~
40233 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
40234 \begin_inset space ~
40238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40240 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
40247 \begin_layout Description
40248 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
40249 \begin_inset space ~
40253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40255 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
40262 \begin_layout Description
40264 \begin_inset space ~
40267 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
40268 \begin_inset space ~
40272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40274 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
40281 \begin_layout Description
40283 \begin_inset space ~
40286 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
40287 \begin_inset space ~
40291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40293 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
40300 \begin_layout Description
40302 \begin_inset space ~
40306 \begin_inset space ~
40309 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
40312 \begin_inset space ~
40316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40318 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
40325 for a usage example.
40328 \begin_layout Description
40330 \begin_inset space ~
40334 \begin_inset space ~
40337 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
40338 \begin_inset space ~
40342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40344 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40351 \begin_layout Description
40353 \begin_inset space ~
40356 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
40357 as described in section
40358 \begin_inset space ~
40362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40364 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
40371 \begin_layout Description
40373 \begin_inset space ~
40376 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
40377 \begin_inset space ~
40381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40383 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40390 \begin_layout Description
40392 \begin_inset space ~
40395 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
40396 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
40398 \begin_inset space ~
40402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40404 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
40411 \begin_layout Description
40413 \begin_inset space ~
40416 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
40417 \begin_inset space ~
40421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40423 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40430 \begin_layout Description
40432 \begin_inset space ~
40436 \begin_inset space ~
40439 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
40440 \begin_inset space ~
40444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40446 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
40453 \begin_layout Subsection
40455 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
40459 \begin_layout Standard
40461 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
40462 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
40463 The submenu allows you to insert
40466 \begin_layout Description
40468 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
40470 \begin_inset space ~
40473 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
40476 \begin_layout Description
40478 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
40480 \begin_inset space ~
40484 \begin_inset space ~
40487 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
40491 \begin_layout Description
40493 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
40495 \begin_inset space ~
40498 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
40501 \begin_layout Description
40503 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
40505 \begin_inset space ~
40508 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
40511 \begin_layout Description
40513 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
40515 \begin_inset space ~
40519 \begin_inset space ~
40522 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
40526 \begin_layout Description
40528 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
40530 \begin_inset space ~
40533 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
40536 \begin_layout Description
40538 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
40540 \begin_inset space ~
40544 \begin_inset space ~
40548 \begin_inset space ~
40551 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
40554 \begin_layout Description
40556 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
40558 \begin_inset space ~
40561 Name inserts the user name as specified in
40563 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40564 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40570 \begin_layout Description
40572 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
40574 \begin_inset space ~
40577 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
40579 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40580 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40586 \begin_layout Description
40588 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
40589 Other\SpecialChar ldots
40590 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
40591 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
40594 \begin_layout Subsection
40598 \begin_layout Standard
40599 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
40603 \begin_inset space ~
40624 are described in section
40625 \begin_inset space ~
40629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40631 reference "sec:toc"
40640 is described in section
40641 \begin_inset space ~
40645 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40647 reference "sec:Index"
40655 is described in section
40656 \begin_inset space ~
40660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40662 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
40668 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40671 is described in section
40672 \begin_inset space ~
40676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40678 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
40685 \begin_layout Subsection
40689 \begin_layout Standard
40690 To insert floats, as described in section
40691 \begin_inset space ~
40695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40697 reference "sec:Floats"
40701 and in detail the chapter
40708 \begin_inset space ~
40716 \begin_layout Subsection
40720 \begin_layout Standard
40721 To insert notes, described in section
40722 \begin_inset space ~
40726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40728 reference "sec:Notes"
40735 \begin_layout Subsection
40739 \begin_layout Standard
40740 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
40742 Branches are described in section
40743 \begin_inset space ~
40747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40749 reference "sec:Branches"
40756 \begin_layout Subsection
40760 \begin_layout Standard
40761 Inserts document class-specific insets.
40762 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
40764 An example is the document class
40765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40772 with three custom insets.
40775 Flex insets and InsetLayout
40779 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
40785 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
40788 \begin_layout Subsection
40790 \begin_inset Index idx
40793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40802 \begin_layout Standard
40803 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
40805 For more information see chapter
40807 External Document Parts
40810 \begin_inset space ~
40816 \begin_layout Subsection
40818 \begin_inset Index idx
40821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40830 \begin_layout Standard
40831 Inserts a box in a certain style.
40832 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
40839 \begin_inset space ~
40847 \begin_layout Subsection
40851 \begin_layout Standard
40856 dialog as described in section
40857 \begin_inset space ~
40861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40863 reference "sec:Bibliography"
40870 \begin_layout Subsection
40874 \begin_layout Standard
40879 as described in section
40880 \begin_inset space ~
40884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40886 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40893 \begin_layout Subsection
40897 \begin_layout Standard
40902 as described in section
40903 \begin_inset space ~
40907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40909 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40916 \begin_layout Subsection
40918 \begin_inset Index idx
40921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40928 \begin_inset Index idx
40931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40932 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
40940 \begin_layout Standard
40941 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
40942 Floats are described in section
40943 \begin_inset space ~
40947 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40949 reference "sec:Floats"
40953 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
40955 Multi-page Captions
40960 \begin_inset space ~
40968 \begin_layout Subsection
40972 \begin_layout Standard
40973 Inserts an index entry as described in section
40974 \begin_inset space ~
40978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40980 reference "sec:Index"
40987 \begin_layout Subsection
40991 \begin_layout Standard
40992 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
40993 \begin_inset space ~
40997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40999 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
41006 \begin_layout Subsection
41010 \begin_layout Standard
41011 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
41012 Tables are described in section
41013 \begin_inset space ~
41017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41019 reference "sec:Tables"
41023 and in detail in the chapter
41030 \begin_inset space ~
41038 \begin_layout Subsection
41042 \begin_layout Standard
41048 Graphics are described in section
41049 \begin_inset space ~
41053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41055 reference "sec:Graphics"
41062 \begin_layout Subsection
41066 \begin_layout Standard
41067 Inserts a URL as described in section
41068 \begin_inset space ~
41072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41074 reference "subsec:URLs"
41081 \begin_layout Subsection
41085 \begin_layout Standard
41086 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
41087 \begin_inset space ~
41091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41093 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
41100 \begin_layout Subsection
41104 \begin_layout Standard
41105 Inserts a footnote as described in section
41106 \begin_inset space ~
41110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41112 reference "sec:Footnotes"
41119 \begin_layout Subsection
41123 \begin_layout Standard
41124 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
41125 \begin_inset space ~
41129 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41131 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
41138 \begin_layout Subsection
41141 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
41144 \begin_layout Standard
41145 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
41146 environments of the same type.
41148 \begin_inset space ~
41152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41154 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
41158 for an explanation.
41161 \begin_layout Subsection
41165 \begin_layout Standard
41166 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
41167 title or caption of a float.
41168 Inserts a short title as described in section
41169 \begin_inset space ~
41173 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41175 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
41182 \begin_layout Subsection
41187 \begin_layout Standard
41188 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
41189 Code box as described in section
41190 \begin_inset space ~
41194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41196 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
41203 \begin_layout Subsection
41205 \begin_inset Index idx
41208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41217 \begin_layout Standard
41218 Inserts a program listings box.
41219 Program listings are explained in the chapter
41221 Program Code Listings
41226 \begin_inset space ~
41234 \begin_layout Subsection
41236 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41240 \begin_layout Standard
41242 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
41243 Inserts the actual date.
41244 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
41251 \begin_layout Subsection
41255 \begin_layout Standard
41256 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
41257 \begin_inset space ~
41261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41263 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41270 \begin_layout Section
41272 \begin_inset Index idx
41275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41284 \begin_layout Standard
41285 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
41286 \begin_inset space ~
41289 of the current document.
41290 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
41293 \begin_layout Subsection
41297 \begin_layout Standard
41298 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
41299 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
41300 to jump, for example, between section
41301 \begin_inset space ~
41305 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
41306 \begin_inset space ~
41309 2.5 and use the submenu
41312 \begin_inset space ~
41316 \begin_inset space ~
41323 \begin_inset space ~
41329 \begin_inset space ~
41333 \begin_inset space ~
41339 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
41343 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
41349 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
41352 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
41355 \begin_layout Standard
41356 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
41360 \begin_inset space ~
41365 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
41368 \begin_inset space ~
41373 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
41376 \begin_layout Subsection
41377 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
41380 \begin_layout Standard
41381 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
41385 \begin_layout Subsection
41389 \begin_layout Standard
41390 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
41391 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
41392 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
41396 \begin_inset space ~
41400 \begin_inset space ~
41408 \begin_layout Subsection
41412 \begin_layout Standard
41413 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
41416 The \SpecialChar LyX
41417 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
41419 \begin_inset space ~
41427 \begin_inset space ~
41432 manual for a detailed description.
41435 \begin_layout Section
41437 \begin_inset Index idx
41440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41449 \begin_layout Subsection
41453 \begin_layout Standard
41454 Change Tracking is described in section
41455 \begin_inset space ~
41459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41461 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
41468 \begin_layout Subsection
41476 \begin_layout Standard
41477 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
41478 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
41479 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41481 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
41482 to the clipboard or update the view.
41483 \begin_inset Newline newline
41486 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41490 \begin_layout Standard
41493 Open Containing Directory
41495 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
41496 's temporary folder for the document.
41497 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
41498 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
41499 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
41500 For example some journals require to send the
41504 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41508 \begin_layout Subsection
41509 Start Appendix Here
41512 \begin_layout Standard
41513 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
41514 as described in section
41515 \begin_inset space ~
41519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41521 reference "sec:Appendices"
41528 \begin_layout Subsection
41530 \begin_inset space ~
41536 \begin_layout Standard
41537 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
41538 default output format for the document (menu
41540 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41541 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41542 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41544 \begin_inset space ~
41548 \begin_inset space ~
41554 \begin_inset space ~
41558 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41560 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41564 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
41567 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41568 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41570 \begin_inset space ~
41573 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41575 \begin_inset space ~
41578 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41580 \begin_inset space ~
41584 \begin_inset space ~
41590 \begin_inset space ~
41594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41596 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41600 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
41601 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
41603 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41604 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41606 \begin_inset space ~
41609 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41611 \begin_inset space ~
41614 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41618 \begin_inset space ~
41622 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41624 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41629 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
41630 when it is first configured.
41631 The default output format is
41634 \begin_inset space ~
41642 \begin_layout Subsection
41643 View (Other Formats)
41646 \begin_layout Standard
41647 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
41648 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
41649 actual document with an external program.
41650 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
41651 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41652 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
41654 All possible formats are listed in section
41655 \begin_inset space ~
41659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41661 reference "subsec:Export"
41666 You should at least see the menu entry
41671 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41673 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
41675 \begin_inset space ~
41679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41681 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
41686 \begin_inset Index idx
41689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41690 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41699 \begin_layout Standard
41700 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
41701 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
41703 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41704 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41706 \begin_inset space ~
41709 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41711 \begin_inset space ~
41714 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41718 \begin_inset space ~
41722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41724 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41729 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
41730 when it is first configured.
41733 \begin_layout Subsection
41735 \begin_inset space ~
41741 \begin_layout Standard
41742 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
41743 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
41746 \begin_layout Subsection
41747 Update (Other Formats)
41750 \begin_layout Standard
41751 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
41752 your document without opening a new viewer window.
41755 \begin_layout Subsection
41756 View Master Document
41759 \begin_layout Standard
41760 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
41762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41776 \begin_inset space ~
41781 manual for more information on this topic).
41782 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
41783 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
41787 \begin_inset space ~
41791 \begin_inset space ~
41796 generates the output of the whole book, while
41800 will just output the chapter alone.
41803 \begin_layout Standard
41804 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
41805 in the document settings (menu
41807 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41808 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41809 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41811 \begin_inset space ~
41815 \begin_inset space ~
41821 \begin_inset space ~
41825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41827 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41831 ) or in the preferences (menu
41833 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41834 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41836 \begin_inset space ~
41839 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41841 \begin_inset space ~
41844 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41846 \begin_inset space ~
41850 \begin_inset space ~
41856 \begin_inset space ~
41860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41862 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41869 \begin_layout Subsection
41870 Update Master Document
41873 \begin_layout Standard
41874 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
41876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41890 \begin_inset space ~
41895 manual for more information on this topic).
41896 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
41897 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
41900 \begin_layout Standard
41901 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
41902 in the document settings (menu
41904 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41905 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41906 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
41908 \begin_inset space ~
41912 \begin_inset space ~
41918 \begin_inset space ~
41922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41924 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
41928 ) or in the preferences (menu
41930 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41931 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41933 \begin_inset space ~
41936 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
41938 \begin_inset space ~
41941 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
41943 \begin_inset space ~
41947 \begin_inset space ~
41953 \begin_inset space ~
41957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41959 reference "sec:File-Formats"
41966 \begin_layout Subsection
41968 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41970 name "subsec:Compressed"
41977 \begin_layout Standard
41978 Un/compresses the current document.
41979 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
41980 compression (see the
41982 Additional Features
41984 manual for details).
41987 \begin_layout Subsection
41991 \begin_layout Standard
41992 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
41995 \begin_layout Subsection
41999 \begin_layout Standard
42000 The document settings are described in appendix
42001 \begin_inset space ~
42005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42007 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42014 \begin_layout Section
42016 \begin_inset Index idx
42019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42028 \begin_layout Subsection
42032 \begin_layout Standard
42033 Spell checking is explained in section
42034 \begin_inset space ~
42038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42040 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
42047 \begin_layout Subsection
42051 \begin_layout Standard
42052 The thesaurus is described in section
42053 \begin_inset space ~
42057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42059 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
42066 \begin_layout Subsection
42068 \begin_inset Index idx
42071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42078 \begin_inset Index idx
42081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42090 \begin_layout Standard
42091 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
42092 the highlighted document part.
42095 \begin_layout Subsection
42101 \begin_inset Index idx
42104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42105 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42114 \begin_layout Standard
42115 Generates with the help of the program
42117 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
42120 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
42121 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
42122 This feature is not available on Windows.
42125 \begin_layout Subsection
42131 \begin_inset Index idx
42134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42144 \begin_layout Standard
42145 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42150 \begin_inset space ~
42155 to see the full filename paths.
42158 \begin_layout Subsection
42160 \begin_inset Index idx
42163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42172 \begin_layout Standard
42173 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
42174 files as described in section
42175 \begin_inset space ~
42179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42181 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
42188 \begin_layout Subsection
42190 \begin_inset Index idx
42193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42206 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42224 \begin_inset Index idx
42227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42228 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
42237 \begin_layout Standard
42238 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
42239 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
42240 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42241 -packages and programs it needs; see
42243 \begin_inset space ~
42247 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42249 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
42256 \begin_layout Subsection
42260 \begin_layout Standard
42265 dialog as described in detail in appendix
42266 \begin_inset space ~
42270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42272 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
42279 \begin_layout Section
42281 \begin_inset Index idx
42284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42293 \begin_layout Standard
42294 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
42295 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
42297 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
42301 \begin_layout Standard
42305 \begin_inset space ~
42310 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
42311 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42312 packages and classes found
42313 by \SpecialChar LyX
42315 \begin_inset space ~
42319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42321 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
42328 \begin_layout Standard
42332 \begin_inset space ~
42337 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
42342 \begin_layout Section
42344 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42346 name "sec:Toolbars"
42353 \begin_layout Standard
42354 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
42355 \begin_inset space ~
42359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42361 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
42368 \begin_layout Standard
42369 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
42370 This is described in the
42372 Additional Features
42377 \begin_layout Subsection
42379 \begin_inset Index idx
42382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42391 \begin_layout Standard
42392 \begin_inset Graphics
42393 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
42401 \begin_layout Standard
42402 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42408 \begin_layout Standard
42409 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42426 \begin_inset Note Note
42429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42430 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
42435 manual for more information.
42443 \begin_layout Standard
42444 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42450 \begin_layout Standard
42451 \begin_inset Tabular
42452 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
42453 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42454 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42455 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
42457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42461 \begin_inset Graphics
42462 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
42472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42476 pull-down box for the environments
42489 \begin_layout Standard
42490 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
42496 \begin_layout Standard
42498 \begin_inset Tabular
42499 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
42500 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42501 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42502 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42503 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42526 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42533 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42556 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42563 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42586 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42593 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42602 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
42610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42616 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42623 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42632 arg "spelling-continuously"
42640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42644 Spellcheck continuously
42650 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42673 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42680 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42703 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42710 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42733 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42740 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42763 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42770 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42793 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42795 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
42800 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42809 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42818 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
42826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42832 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42834 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42838 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42851 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42858 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
42866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42872 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42874 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42878 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42882 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42891 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42900 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
42908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42914 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42915 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
42922 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42943 Emphasize text, function of the
42944 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
42947 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42949 \begin_inset space ~
42952 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42954 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
42960 arg "dialog-show character"
42971 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42992 Set text to noun style, function of the
42993 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
42996 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42998 \begin_inset space ~
43001 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43003 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
43009 arg "dialog-show character"
43020 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43026 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
43029 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
43037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43042 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
43045 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43052 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43058 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
43063 arg "textstyle-apply"
43073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43078 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
43079 Format text using the current settings in the
43081 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43083 \begin_inset space ~
43086 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
43097 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43120 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43121 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
43123 \begin_inset space ~
43132 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43141 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
43149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43155 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43162 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43169 arg "tabular-insert"
43177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43183 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43190 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43196 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
43199 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
43207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43212 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
43215 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43222 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43231 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
43239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43243 Toggle outline window on/off,
43245 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43252 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43261 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
43269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43273 Toggle math toolbar on/off
43279 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43288 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
43296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43300 Toggle table toolbar on/off
43313 \begin_layout Subsection
43315 \begin_inset Index idx
43318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43327 \begin_layout Standard
43328 \begin_inset Graphics
43329 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
43337 \begin_layout Standard
43338 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43344 \begin_layout Standard
43345 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43349 \begin_layout Standard
43350 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43356 \begin_layout Standard
43357 \begin_inset Tabular
43358 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
43359 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43360 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43361 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43362 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43389 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43398 arg "layout Enumerate"
43406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43416 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43425 arg "layout Itemize"
43433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43443 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43470 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43479 arg "layout Description"
43487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43497 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43506 arg "depth-increment"
43514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43520 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43522 \begin_inset space ~
43526 \begin_inset space ~
43535 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43544 arg "depth-decrement"
43552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43558 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
43560 \begin_inset space ~
43564 \begin_inset space ~
43573 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43582 arg "float-insert figure"
43590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43596 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43597 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
43604 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43613 arg "float-insert table"
43621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43627 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43628 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
43635 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43658 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43665 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43674 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
43682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43688 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43695 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43704 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
43712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43718 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43725 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43748 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43750 \begin_inset space ~
43759 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43768 arg "nomencl-insert"
43776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43782 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43784 \begin_inset space ~
43793 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43802 arg "footnote-insert"
43810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43816 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43823 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43832 arg "marginalnote-insert"
43840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43846 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43848 \begin_inset space ~
43857 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43880 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43881 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
43883 \begin_inset space ~
43892 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43901 arg "box-insert Frameless"
43909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43915 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43922 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43945 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43952 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43975 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43977 \begin_inset space ~
43986 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43995 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
44003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44009 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44010 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44017 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44026 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
44034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44040 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44041 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44043 \begin_inset space ~
44052 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44061 arg "dialog-show character"
44069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44075 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44077 \begin_inset space ~
44080 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44087 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44093 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
44098 arg "textstyle-apply"
44106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44111 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
44112 Format text using the recent settings in the
44115 arg "dialog-show character"
44124 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44133 arg "layout-paragraph"
44141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44147 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44149 \begin_inset space ~
44158 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44167 arg "thesaurus-entry"
44175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44181 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44195 \begin_layout Subsection
44196 View/Update Toolbar
44197 \begin_inset Index idx
44200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44201 Toolbar ! View / Update
44209 \begin_layout Standard
44210 \begin_inset Graphics
44211 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
44218 \begin_layout Standard
44219 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44225 \begin_layout Standard
44226 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44230 \begin_layout Standard
44231 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44237 \begin_layout Standard
44238 \begin_inset Tabular
44239 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
44240 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44241 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44242 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44243 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44266 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44273 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44282 arg "buffer-update"
44290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44296 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44303 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44312 arg "master-buffer-view"
44320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44326 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44328 \begin_inset space ~
44337 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44346 arg "master-buffer-update"
44354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44360 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44362 \begin_inset space ~
44366 \begin_inset space ~
44375 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44384 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
44392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44398 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44399 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44400 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44401 Synchronize with Output
44407 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44418 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
44428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44434 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44435 View (Other Formats)
44441 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44448 arg "update-others"
44452 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
44460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44466 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44467 Update (Other Formats)
44480 \begin_layout Standard
44482 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
44483 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
44489 \begin_layout Subsection
44493 \begin_layout Standard
44494 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
44495 \begin_inset space ~
44499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44501 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44505 , the table toolbar
44506 \begin_inset Index idx
44509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44518 \begin_inset space ~
44523 manual and the math macro toolbar
44524 \begin_inset Index idx
44527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44540 \begin_layout Chapter
44541 The Document Settings
44542 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44544 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
44549 \begin_inset Index idx
44552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44553 Document ! Settings
44561 \begin_layout Standard
44565 \begin_inset space ~
44570 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
44571 is called with the menu
44573 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44577 You can save your document settings as default with the
44579 Save as Document Defaults
44581 button in any dialog.
44582 This will create a template named
44586 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
44587 when you create a new document without
44591 \begin_layout Standard
44596 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
44597 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
44600 \begin_layout Standard
44601 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
44602 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
44603 to find the one you are looking for.
44604 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
44605 the submenus of the dialog.
44607 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44611 \begin_inset space \space{}
44615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44622 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
44623 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
44624 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
44627 \begin_layout Section
44631 \begin_layout Standard
44632 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
44634 Document classes are described in section
44635 \begin_inset space ~
44639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44641 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
44649 \begin_layout Standard
44653 \begin_inset space ~
44658 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
44663 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
44664 as a layout for a document class.
44665 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
44667 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
44676 \begin_layout Standard
44677 Some classes use special class options by default.
44678 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
44682 and you can decide to use them or not.
44683 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
44684 recommended you leave them untouched.
44689 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44690 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
44695 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44697 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
44702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44703 When you want to use one of the following drivers
44704 \begin_inset Newline newline
44709 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
44712 \begin_inset Newline newline
44715 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44716 distribution, see section
44721 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44723 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
44736 \begin_layout Standard
44741 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
44742 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
44743 in the background if the child document
44744 is opened without its master.
44745 This way child documents are always compilable.
44746 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
44753 \begin_inset space ~
44761 \begin_layout Standard
44762 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44773 \begin_inset Index idx
44776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44778 packages ! prettyref
44784 \begin_inset Index idx
44787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44789 packages ! refstyle
44794 for cross-references, see section
44795 \begin_inset space ~
44799 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44801 reference "sec:Cross-References"
44808 \begin_layout Section
44812 \begin_layout Standard
44813 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
44814 Please refer to the section
44817 \begin_inset space ~
44825 \begin_inset space ~
44830 manual for details.
44833 \begin_layout Section
44837 \begin_layout Standard
44838 Modules are explained in section
44839 \begin_inset space ~
44843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44845 reference "subsec:Modules"
44852 \begin_layout Section
44856 \begin_layout Standard
44858 \begin_inset space ~
44862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44864 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
44871 \begin_layout Section
44875 \begin_layout Standard
44876 The document font settings are described in section
44877 \begin_inset space ~
44881 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44883 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
44890 \begin_layout Section
44894 \begin_layout Standard
44895 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
44907 \begin_inset space ~
44912 and whether it should be a
44915 \begin_inset space ~
44920 can also be specified here.
44923 \begin_layout Standard
44924 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
44925 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
44926 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
44928 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
44931 \begin_layout Standard
44934 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
44937 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
44938 justifies the text on screen.
44939 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
44943 \begin_layout Section
44947 \begin_layout Standard
44948 This dialog is described in sections
44949 \begin_inset space ~
44953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44955 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
44960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44962 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
44969 \begin_layout Section
44973 \begin_layout Standard
44974 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
44975 \begin_inset space ~
44979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44981 reference "subsec:Margins"
44988 \begin_layout Section
44990 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44992 name "sec:Language-encodings"
44997 \begin_inset Index idx
45000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45001 Language ! Encoding
45009 \begin_layout Standard
45010 The document language and quote styles are set here.
45011 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
45012 (the \SpecialChar LyX
45014 is always encoded in utf8).
45015 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
45016 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
45017 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
45018 -command is not known for
45019 a particular character).
45022 \begin_layout Standard
45023 If you use the option
45028 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
45029 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
45030 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45032 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
45033 exactly one encoding.
45034 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
45037 \begin_layout Standard
45039 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
45040 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
45041 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
45042 installation supports Unicode), choose
45043 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
45044 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45045 is quite incomplete, so
45046 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
45051 (when \SpecialChar LyX
45052 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45053 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
45054 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
45055 -commands is not used, because all
45056 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
45057 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45058 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45059 , two new alternative engines
45060 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
45062 Both engines support Unicode natively.
45064 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
45067 \begin_inset space ~
45075 \begin_inset space ~
45083 \begin_inset space ~
45089 \begin_inset space ~
45093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45095 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
45100 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
45104 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
45107 \begin_layout Standard
45111 \begin_inset space ~
45116 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45117 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
45119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45127 The possible settings are:
45130 \begin_layout Description
45131 Default uses the language package that is selected in
45133 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45134 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45138 \begin_inset space ~
45142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45144 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
45151 \begin_layout Description
45152 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
45153 format you will use.
45154 In many cases this will be
45159 \begin_inset Index idx
45162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45170 If the newer package
45175 \begin_inset Index idx
45178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45180 packages ! polyglossia
45185 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45186 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45187 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
45189 this package will be used instead of
45196 \begin_layout Description
45198 \begin_inset space ~
45209 would be more appropriate.
45212 \begin_layout Description
45213 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
45214 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
45218 (for German texts), type in
45221 \begin_inset Newline newline
45226 usepackage{ngerman}
45229 \begin_layout Description
45230 None will not use a language package.
45231 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
45234 \begin_layout Standard
45235 Here is a list with the important encodings:
45238 \begin_layout Description
45240 \begin_inset space ~
45244 \begin_inset space ~
45248 \begin_inset space ~
45255 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45261 \begin_inset Index idx
45264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45266 packages ! inputenc
45272 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
45273 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
45274 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
45278 \begin_layout Description
45279 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
45281 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
45282 commands, which may result in a big
45283 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
45284 -commands are needed.
45287 \begin_layout Description
45289 \begin_inset space ~
45293 \begin_inset space ~
45296 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
45299 \begin_layout Description
45301 \begin_inset space ~
45305 \begin_inset space ~
45308 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
45311 \begin_layout Description
45313 \begin_inset space ~
45316 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
45319 \begin_layout Description
45321 \begin_inset space ~
45325 \begin_inset space ~
45328 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
45329 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
45332 \begin_layout Description
45334 \begin_inset space ~
45338 \begin_inset space ~
45341 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
45345 \begin_layout Description
45347 \begin_inset space ~
45351 \begin_inset space ~
45354 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
45355 ISO-8859-13 encoding
45358 \begin_layout Description
45360 \begin_inset space ~
45364 \begin_inset space ~
45368 \begin_inset space ~
45371 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
45372 \begin_inset space ~
45378 \begin_layout Description
45380 \begin_inset space ~
45384 \begin_inset space ~
45388 \begin_inset space ~
45391 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
45392 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
45395 \begin_layout Description
45397 \begin_inset space ~
45401 \begin_inset space ~
45404 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
45405 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
45406 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45407 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
45408 \begin_inset space ~
45412 \begin_inset space ~
45418 \begin_layout Description
45420 \begin_inset space ~
45424 \begin_inset space ~
45427 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
45428 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
45429 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45431 should try to use the encoding Unicode
45432 \begin_inset space ~
45436 \begin_inset space ~
45442 \begin_layout Description
45444 \begin_inset space ~
45448 \begin_inset space ~
45451 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
45454 \begin_layout Description
45456 \begin_inset space ~
45460 \begin_inset space ~
45463 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
45466 \begin_layout Description
45468 \begin_inset space ~
45472 \begin_inset space ~
45475 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
45478 \begin_layout Description
45480 \begin_inset space ~
45483 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
45486 \begin_layout Description
45488 \begin_inset space ~
45491 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
45494 \begin_layout Description
45496 \begin_inset space ~
45500 \begin_inset space ~
45503 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
45506 \begin_layout Description
45508 \begin_inset space ~
45512 \begin_inset space ~
45518 \begin_layout Description
45520 \begin_inset space ~
45524 \begin_inset space ~
45527 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
45530 \begin_layout Description
45532 \begin_inset space ~
45536 \begin_inset space ~
45542 \begin_layout Description
45544 \begin_inset space ~
45548 \begin_inset space ~
45551 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45557 \begin_inset Index idx
45560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45567 , when using this, set the document language to
45572 \begin_layout Description
45574 \begin_inset space ~
45578 \begin_inset space ~
45581 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45586 , when using this, set the document language to
45589 \begin_inset space ~
45595 \begin_layout Description
45597 \begin_inset space ~
45601 \begin_inset space ~
45604 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45610 \begin_inset Index idx
45613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45615 packages ! japanese
45620 , when using this, set the document language to
45625 \begin_layout Description
45627 \begin_inset space ~
45631 \begin_inset space ~
45634 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45639 , when using this, set the document language to
45644 \begin_layout Description
45646 \begin_inset space ~
45650 \begin_inset space ~
45653 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45658 , when using this, set the document language to
45663 \begin_layout Description
45665 \begin_inset space ~
45668 (EUC-KR) for Korean
45671 \begin_layout Description
45673 \begin_inset space ~
45677 \begin_inset space ~
45681 \begin_inset space ~
45684 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
45687 \begin_layout Description
45689 \begin_inset space ~
45693 \begin_inset space ~
45697 \begin_inset space ~
45700 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
45701 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
45702 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
45705 \begin_layout Description
45707 \begin_inset space ~
45711 \begin_inset space ~
45717 \begin_layout Description
45719 \begin_inset space ~
45723 \begin_inset space ~
45726 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
45727 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
45730 \begin_layout Description
45732 \begin_inset space ~
45736 \begin_inset space ~
45739 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45745 \begin_inset Index idx
45748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45755 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
45758 \begin_layout Description
45760 \begin_inset space ~
45768 \begin_inset space ~
45771 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
45778 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45781 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45788 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
45789 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
45791 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
45794 \begin_layout Description
45796 \begin_inset space ~
45800 \begin_inset space ~
45803 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45809 \begin_inset Index idx
45812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45819 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
45822 \begin_layout Description
45824 \begin_inset space ~
45827 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45833 \begin_inset Index idx
45836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45838 packages ! inputenc
45844 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
45848 \begin_layout Description
45850 \begin_inset space ~
45854 \begin_inset space ~
45858 \begin_inset space ~
45861 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
45862 \begin_inset space ~
45868 \begin_layout Description
45870 \begin_inset space ~
45874 \begin_inset space ~
45878 \begin_inset space ~
45881 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
45882 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
45883 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
45887 \begin_layout Description
45889 \begin_inset space ~
45893 \begin_inset space ~
45897 \begin_inset space ~
45900 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
45901 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
45904 \begin_layout Section
45906 \begin_inset Index idx
45909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45916 \begin_inset Index idx
45919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45926 \begin_inset Index idx
45929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45930 Color ! Shaded boxes
45936 \begin_inset Index idx
45939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45940 Color ! Greyed-out notes
45948 \begin_layout Standard
45949 Here you can alter the font color for the
45953 (default: black), for
45956 \begin_inset space ~
45961 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
45965 (default: white) and for
45968 \begin_inset space ~
45978 sets the color back to the default.
45981 \begin_layout Standard
45982 Clicking any button showing
45990 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
45991 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
45992 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
45993 later more quickly.
45996 \begin_layout Standard
45997 Note, if you change the
46000 \begin_inset space ~
46005 font color and use the option
46008 \begin_inset space ~
46013 in the document settings under
46016 \begin_inset space ~
46021 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
46022 \begin_inset space ~
46026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46028 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
46035 \begin_layout Standard
46036 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
46042 \begin_layout Standard
46046 \begin_inset space ~
46055 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
46058 \begin_inset space ~
46061 Code after a forced page break:
46064 \begin_layout Itemize
46065 For the page color:
46066 \begin_inset Newline newline
46073 pagecolor{color name}
46076 \begin_layout Itemize
46077 For the text color:
46078 \begin_inset Newline newline
46088 \begin_layout Standard
46089 You are restricted to one of
46125 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
46132 \begin_inset space ~
46138 \begin_inset Newline newline
46141 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
46142 names to refer to them:
46145 \begin_layout Itemize
46151 \begin_inset Newline newline
46156 page_backgroundcolor
46159 \begin_layout Itemize
46163 \begin_inset space ~
46169 \begin_inset Newline newline
46177 \begin_layout Itemize
46181 \begin_inset space ~
46187 \begin_inset Newline newline
46195 \begin_layout Itemize
46199 \begin_inset space ~
46205 \begin_inset Newline newline
46213 \begin_layout Standard
46214 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
46217 \begin_inset space ~
46225 \begin_inset space ~
46233 \begin_layout Section
46237 \begin_layout Standard
46238 Here you can adjust the
46242 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
46246 as described in section
46247 \begin_inset space ~
46251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46253 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
46260 \begin_layout Section
46264 \begin_layout Standard
46265 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46271 \begin_inset Index idx
46274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46276 packages ! biblatex
46286 \begin_inset Index idx
46289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46301 \begin_inset Index idx
46304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46312 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46315 Sectioned bibliography
46317 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46323 \begin_inset Index idx
46326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46328 packages ! bibtopic
46338 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
46339 Finally, you can select a document-specific
46343 for the generation of the bibliography.
46344 For a further description of these possibilities see section
46345 \begin_inset space ~
46349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46351 reference "sec:Bibliography"
46358 \begin_layout Section
46362 \begin_layout Standard
46363 Here you can define the
46367 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
46369 \begin_inset space ~
46373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46375 reference "sec:Index"
46382 \begin_layout Section
46386 \begin_layout Standard
46387 The PDF properties are explained in section
46388 \begin_inset space ~
46392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46394 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
46401 \begin_layout Section
46405 \begin_layout Standard
46406 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
46407 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46413 \begin_inset Index idx
46416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46428 \begin_inset Index idx
46431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46443 \begin_inset Index idx
46446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46458 \begin_inset Index idx
46461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46473 \begin_inset Index idx
46476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46478 packages ! mathdots
46488 \begin_inset Index idx
46491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46493 packages ! mathtools
46503 \begin_inset Index idx
46506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46518 \begin_inset Index idx
46521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46523 packages ! stackrel
46533 \begin_inset Index idx
46536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46538 packages ! stmaryrd
46548 \begin_inset Index idx
46551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46553 packages ! undertilde
46558 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
46561 \begin_layout Description
46562 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
46563 -errors in formulas,
46564 ensure that you have this enabled.
46567 \begin_layout Description
46568 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
46569 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
46570 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
46574 \begin_layout Description
46575 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
46578 \begin_inset space ~
46590 \begin_layout Description
46591 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
46594 \begin_inset space ~
46606 \begin_layout Description
46607 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
46618 \begin_layout Description
46619 mathtools is used for the math commands
46655 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
46662 \begin_layout Description
46663 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
46665 Chemical Symbols and Equations
46674 \begin_layout Description
46675 stackrel is used for the math command
46692 \begin_layout Description
46693 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
46696 \begin_layout Description
46697 undertilde is used for the math command
46705 Accents for one Character
46714 \begin_layout Section
46716 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
46718 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
46724 \begin_layout Standard
46726 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
46727 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
46730 \begin_layout Standard
46732 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
46733 The float placement options
46734 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
46737 are described in the section
46740 \begin_inset space ~
46744 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
46746 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
46754 \begin_inset space ~
46762 \begin_layout Section
46766 \begin_layout Standard
46767 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
46769 Program Code Listings
46774 \begin_inset space ~
46782 \begin_layout Section
46786 \begin_layout Standard
46787 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
46795 set to be used and set the
46800 The itemize environment is described in section
46801 \begin_inset space ~
46805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46807 reference "sec:Itemize"
46814 \begin_layout Standard
46815 You can furthermore specify a
46818 \begin_inset space ~
46823 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46824 command of the desired character.
46825 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
46832 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
46834 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46838 \begin_inset space \space{}
46842 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
46852 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
46853 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
46856 \begin_layout Standard
46857 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46865 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
46866 -packages in the preamble (menu
46869 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46870 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46873 \begin_inset space ~
46879 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
46883 usepackage{textcomp}
46886 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
46890 usepackage{amssymb}
46900 \begin_layout Section
46904 \begin_layout Standard
46905 Branches are described in section
46906 \begin_inset space ~
46910 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46912 reference "sec:Branches"
46919 \begin_layout Section
46921 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46923 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
46930 \begin_layout Standard
46931 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
46934 \begin_layout Description
46936 \begin_inset space ~
46940 \begin_inset space ~
46943 Format: The format that is used when you enter
46944 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46948 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46963 View Master Document
46964 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46971 Update Master Document
46972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46979 menu or the toolbar.
46980 The default is set in
46982 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46983 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46985 \begin_inset space ~
46988 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
46992 \begin_inset space ~
46996 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46998 reference "sec:File-Formats"
47005 \begin_layout Description
47007 \begin_inset space ~
47011 \begin_inset space ~
47014 Output settings for the menu
47016 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47018 \begin_inset space ~
47024 For a detailed description see section
47026 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47031 \begin_inset space ~
47039 \begin_layout Description
47041 \begin_inset space ~
47045 \begin_inset space ~
47048 Options offers settings for the export format
47056 \begin_inset space ~
47061 will assure that the output follows exactly version
47062 \begin_inset space ~
47065 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
47069 \begin_inset space ~
47074 settings are described in detail in section
47076 Math Output in XHTML
47081 \begin_inset space ~
47090 \begin_inset space ~
47094 \begin_inset space ~
47099 is used for the size of equations in the output.
47102 \begin_layout Description
47104 \begin_inset space ~
47109 Save transient properties
47111 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
47112 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
47113 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
47117 \begin_layout Itemize
47118 the activation of change tracking
47121 \begin_layout Itemize
47122 the output of tracked changes
47125 \begin_layout Itemize
47126 the recording of the document directory path.
47129 \begin_layout Standard
47130 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
47131 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
47135 \begin_layout Section
47143 \begin_layout Standard
47144 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47146 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
47148 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47150 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
47154 \begin_layout Standard
47155 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47156 -syntax is given in section
47157 \begin_inset space ~
47161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47163 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
47170 \begin_layout Chapter
47176 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47178 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
47183 \begin_inset Index idx
47186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47195 \begin_layout Standard
47196 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
47198 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47202 It has the following submenus.
47205 \begin_layout Section
47209 \begin_layout Subsection
47213 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47214 User Interface File
47215 \begin_inset Index idx
47218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47219 Customization ! of toolbars
47225 \begin_inset Index idx
47228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47229 Customization ! of menus
47237 \begin_layout Standard
47238 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
47239 interface (ui) file.
47240 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
47248 \begin_layout Description
47253 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
47256 \begin_layout Description
47263 the menu entries in popup context menus
47266 \begin_layout Description
47271 specifies the toolbar buttons
47274 \begin_layout Standard
47275 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
47276 and edit the entries.
47279 \begin_layout Standard
47280 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
47292 entries must be finished with an explicit
47317 and in the case of the
47318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47330 The syntax for the entries is:
47333 \begin_layout Standard
47334 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47363 \begin_layout Standard
47365 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47368 All the \SpecialChar LyX
47369 -functions are listed in the menu
47371 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
47373 \begin_inset space ~
47381 \begin_layout Standard
47382 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
47388 \begin_layout Standard
47389 For example, assuming you use the menu
47391 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47394 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
47398 \begin_layout Standard
47399 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47423 \begin_layout Standard
47425 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
47429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47440 to have the sixth bookmark.
47443 \begin_layout Standard
47447 \begin_inset space ~
47452 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
47453 's toolbar buttons.
47454 The currently available icon sets are compared in
47455 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47458 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
47466 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47470 \begin_layout Standard
47473 Enable tool tips in main work area
47475 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
47479 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47483 \begin_layout Standard
47488 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
47489 should display in the menu
47491 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47493 \begin_inset space ~
47501 \begin_layout Subsection
47505 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47509 \begin_layout Standard
47512 Restore window layouts and geometries
47515 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
47516 the last \SpecialChar LyX
47520 \begin_layout Standard
47523 Restore cursor positions
47525 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
47529 \begin_layout Standard
47532 Load opened files from last session
47534 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
47538 \begin_layout Standard
47541 Clear all session information
47543 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
47544 sessions (cursor positions, names
47545 of last opened documents, etc.).
47548 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47550 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47552 name "subsec:Backup documents"
47557 \begin_inset Index idx
47560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47569 \begin_layout Standard
47572 Backup original documents when saving
47574 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
47575 it was saved the last time.
47576 It is stored in the
47579 \begin_inset space ~
47585 \begin_inset space ~
47589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47591 reference "sec:Paths"
47595 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
47598 \begin_inset space ~
47604 The backup file has the file extension
47605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47619 \begin_layout Standard
47622 Backup documents, every
47624 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
47627 \begin_layout Standard
47630 Save documents compressed by default
47632 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
47633 \begin_inset space ~
47637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47639 reference "subsec:Compressed"
47644 This applies to newly created documents only.
47645 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
47648 \begin_layout Subsubsection
47649 Windows & work area
47652 \begin_layout Standard
47655 Open documents in tabs
47657 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
47661 \begin_layout Standard
47666 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
47671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47673 \begin_inset space ~
47677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47679 reference "sec:Paths"
47683 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
47690 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
47691 documents will be opened in the same running instance
47692 of \SpecialChar LyX
47694 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
47695 instance is created for each file.
47698 \begin_layout Standard
47701 Single close-tab button
47703 is checked, there will only be one close button (
47713 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
47714 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
47715 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
47719 \begin_layout Standard
47720 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47728 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
47729 before the change takes effect.
47737 \begin_layout Standard
47742 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
47744 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
47746 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
47750 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
47751 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
47752 and only want to close the view in once instance.
47755 \begin_layout Subsection
47757 \begin_inset Index idx
47760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47767 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47769 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
47776 \begin_layout Standard
47777 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
47781 \begin_layout Standard
47782 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47790 This section only deals with the fonts
47794 the \SpecialChar LyX
47796 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
47799 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47800 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47811 \begin_layout Standard
47812 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
47829 (depends on the system) as its
47832 \begin_inset space ~
47848 \begin_layout Standard
47849 You can change the font size with the
47856 \begin_layout Standard
47861 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
47863 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47866 points have the size of 1
47867 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47871 \begin_inset space ~
47875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47877 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
47882 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
47883 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47887 The sizes are explained in detail in section
47888 \begin_inset space ~
47892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47894 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
47901 \begin_layout Subsection
47903 \begin_inset Index idx
47906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47907 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
47914 \begin_inset Index idx
47917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47926 \begin_layout Standard
47927 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
47928 by choosing an item in the
47929 list and selecting the
47936 \begin_layout Standard
47937 By checking the option
47941 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
47944 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
47945 \begin_inset space ~
47949 \begin_inset space ~
47954 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
47957 \begin_layout Subsection
47959 \begin_inset Index idx
47962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47971 \begin_layout Standard
47972 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
47976 \begin_layout Standard
47981 enables previewing snippets of your document.
47982 This feature is described in section
47983 \begin_inset space ~
47987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47989 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
47996 \begin_layout Standard
47997 Checking the option
48000 \begin_inset space ~
48004 \begin_inset space ~
48008 \begin_inset space ~
48013 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
48016 \begin_layout Section
48018 \begin_inset Index idx
48021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48030 \begin_layout Subsection
48034 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48038 \begin_layout Standard
48041 Cursor follows scrollbar
48043 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
48047 \begin_layout Standard
48048 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
48049 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
48050 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
48053 \begin_layout Standard
48056 Scroll below end of document
48058 is self-explanatory.
48061 \begin_layout Standard
48062 In \SpecialChar LyX
48063 one can jump from word to word by pressing
48070 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
48072 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
48073 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
48076 \begin_layout Standard
48079 Sort environments alphabetically
48081 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48084 \begin_layout Standard
48087 Group environments by their category
48089 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
48092 \begin_layout Standard
48097 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
48108 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48112 \begin_layout Standard
48113 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
48118 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
48119 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
48123 \begin_layout Subsection
48125 \begin_inset Index idx
48128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48135 \begin_inset Index idx
48138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48139 Settings ! Shortcuts
48147 \begin_layout Standard
48152 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
48154 Several binding files are available, among them:
48157 \begin_layout Description
48158 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
48161 \begin_layout Description
48162 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
48174 \begin_layout Description
48175 mac.bind a set of bindings for
48178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48186 \begin_layout Standard
48187 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
48192 , and binding files for special languages.
48193 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
48194 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48198 \begin_inset space \space{}
48202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48210 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
48211 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
48212 will try to use the appropriate binding
48216 \begin_layout Standard
48217 Some binding files, like
48221 , only have a limited scope.
48222 When looking at the end of the file
48226 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
48229 \begin_layout Standard
48233 \begin_inset space ~
48237 \begin_inset space ~
48242 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
48243 in the selected key binding file.
48246 \begin_layout Subsubsection
48248 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48250 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
48255 \begin_inset Index idx
48258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48259 Key Bindings ! Editing
48267 \begin_layout Standard
48268 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
48269 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
48270 functions and the bound shortcuts.
48271 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
48274 Show key-bindings containing
48277 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
48278 Insert there for example as keyword
48279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48286 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
48287 functions that contain
48288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48296 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
48297 All \SpecialChar LyX
48298 functions are also listed in the file
48303 that you will find in the
48310 \begin_layout Standard
48311 For example, to add the shortcut
48319 , select the function and press the
48324 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
48325 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
48328 \begin_layout Standard
48329 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
48330 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
48332 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
48333 function names as a semicolon separated list.
48335 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
48340 \begin_layout Standard
48341 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
48344 \begin_layout Standard
48345 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
48347 The syntax of the entries is:
48350 \begin_layout Standard
48356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48375 \begin_layout Standard
48376 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
48377 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
48378 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48405 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
48406 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
48407 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
48408 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
48410 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
48414 , you needed to specify it as
48419 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
48422 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
48425 \begin_layout Subsection
48427 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48429 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
48434 \begin_inset Index idx
48437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48444 \begin_inset Index idx
48447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48448 Settings ! Keyboard Map
48456 \begin_layout Standard
48457 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
48458 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
48459 provides keyboard maps.
48460 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
48461 is a Romanian one, you can enable
48464 \begin_inset space ~
48468 \begin_inset space ~
48473 and select the keyboard map file named
48480 \begin_layout Standard
48489 keyboard map and, if you use the
48493 bindings, you can select the first and second with
48496 arg "keymap-primary"
48502 arg "keymap-secondary"
48505 respectively or toggle between them with
48508 arg "keymap-toggle"
48514 \begin_layout Standard
48515 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48523 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
48532 \begin_layout Standard
48533 You can also specify the mouse
48535 Wheel scrolling speed
48538 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
48542 Middle mouse button pasting
48544 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
48545 inserts the content of the clipboard.
48548 \begin_layout Standard
48556 \begin_inset space ~
48560 \begin_inset space ~
48565 you can select a key for zooming.
48566 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
48569 \begin_layout Subsection
48573 \begin_layout Standard
48574 Input completion is described in section
48575 \begin_inset space ~
48579 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48581 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
48588 \begin_layout Section
48590 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48597 \begin_inset Index idx
48600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48607 \begin_inset Index idx
48610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48619 \begin_layout Standard
48620 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
48621 are normally determined during
48623 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
48626 \begin_layout Description
48628 \begin_inset space ~
48631 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
48632 's working directory.
48633 It is the default when you
48644 \begin_inset space ~
48652 \begin_layout Description
48654 \begin_inset space ~
48657 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
48659 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48661 \begin_inset space ~
48665 \begin_inset space ~
48673 \begin_layout Description
48675 \begin_inset space ~
48678 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
48684 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
48688 \begin_inset Newline newline
48692 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48704 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
48705 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
48713 \begin_layout Description
48715 \begin_inset space ~
48719 \begin_inset Index idx
48722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48728 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
48729 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
48730 \begin_inset space ~
48734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48736 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
48744 will be used to save the backups.
48745 \begin_inset Newline newline
48748 Backup files have the ending
48749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48759 \begin_layout Description
48761 \begin_inset space ~
48764 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
48765 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
48767 \begin_inset Newline newline
48774 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48780 You can edit this file with the program
48789 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
48790 in its preferences under
48793 \begin_inset space ~
48799 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
48804 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
48806 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
48807 in your \SpecialChar LyX
48813 and \SpecialChar LyX
48814 need to be running the same time.
48815 \begin_inset Newline newline
48818 The pipe is also used for the
48822 feature, see section
48823 \begin_inset space ~
48827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48829 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
48834 \begin_inset Newline newline
48837 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
48838 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
48839 \begin_inset Newline newline
48855 \begin_layout Description
48857 \begin_inset space ~
48860 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
48863 \begin_layout Description
48865 \begin_inset space ~
48868 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
48869 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
48870 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
48873 \begin_layout Description
48875 \begin_inset space ~
48878 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
48884 You only need to specify it if you are using
48888 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
48890 For \SpecialChar LyX
48895 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
48899 \begin_layout Description
48901 \begin_inset space ~
48904 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
48905 When \SpecialChar LyX
48906 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
48907 to find it on the system.
48908 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
48910 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
48912 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48916 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48919 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
48920 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
48923 \begin_layout Description
48925 \begin_inset space ~
48928 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
48929 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
48930 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
48931 code or in the document
48933 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
48935 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
48936 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
48937 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
48938 scanned for the input files.
48939 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
48940 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
48942 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
48943 compilation may fail for some documents.
48946 \begin_layout Section
48950 \begin_layout Standard
48951 Here you can insert your
48960 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
48962 \begin_inset space ~
48966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48968 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
48972 , to mark changes you make as yours.
48975 \begin_layout Section
48977 \begin_inset Index idx
48980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48981 Language ! Settings
48987 \begin_inset Index idx
48990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48991 Settings ! Language
48999 \begin_layout Subsection
49001 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49003 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
49010 \begin_layout Description
49012 \begin_inset space ~
49016 \begin_inset space ~
49019 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
49021 You can find its actual translation status here:
49022 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49024 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
49032 \begin_layout Description
49034 \begin_inset space ~
49037 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
49038 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
49039 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
49040 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
49041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49057 The most widespread language package is
49062 \begin_inset Index idx
49065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49072 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
49074 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
49075 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
49076 come with the alternative
49082 \begin_inset Index idx
49085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49087 packages ! polyglossia
49092 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
49093 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
49099 The available selections are described in section
49100 \begin_inset space ~
49104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49106 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
49113 \begin_layout Description
49115 \begin_inset space ~
49118 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
49119 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
49120 you can here specify the command to start the package.
49121 An example is the start command
49127 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
49129 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
49133 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49149 selectlanguage{$$lang}
49154 \begin_layout Description
49156 \begin_inset space ~
49164 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
49165 command toggles the package on and off.
49168 \begin_layout Description
49170 \begin_inset space ~
49174 \begin_inset space ~
49177 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
49181 \begin_layout Description
49183 \begin_inset space ~
49187 \begin_inset space ~
49190 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
49194 \begin_layout Description
49196 \begin_inset space ~
49200 \begin_inset space ~
49203 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
49204 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
49205 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
49207 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
49214 \begin_layout Description
49216 \begin_inset space ~
49219 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
49221 When this option is not set, the
49224 \begin_inset space ~
49229 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49231 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
49234 \begin_inset space ~
49242 \begin_layout Description
49244 \begin_inset space ~
49250 \begin_inset space ~
49256 When it is not set, the
49259 \begin_inset space ~
49264 is set to the end of the document.
49267 \begin_layout Description
49269 \begin_inset space ~
49273 \begin_inset space ~
49276 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
49277 language will be underlined in blue.
49280 \begin_layout Description
49282 \begin_inset space ~
49286 \begin_inset space ~
49289 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
49290 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
49293 \begin_layout Description
49295 \begin_inset space ~
49298 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
49299 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
49300 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
49301 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
49304 \begin_layout Subsection
49308 \begin_layout Standard
49309 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
49310 \begin_inset space ~
49314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49316 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
49323 \begin_layout Section
49327 \begin_layout Subsection
49329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49331 name "subsec:General-output"
49338 \begin_layout Description
49340 \begin_inset space ~
49343 search Commands that will be used for the menu
49345 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49347 \begin_inset space ~
49353 For a detailed description see section
49355 Reverse DVI/PDF search
49360 \begin_inset space ~
49368 \begin_layout Description
49370 \begin_inset space ~
49373 Options Options for the program
49377 that is used for the export format
49382 \begin_inset space ~
49386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49388 reference "subsec:Export"
49393 Possible options are listed in the
49398 \begin_inset Newline newline
49402 \begin_inset Flex URL
49405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49407 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
49417 \begin_layout Description
49419 \begin_inset space ~
49423 \begin_inset space ~
49426 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
49429 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49430 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
49432 \begin_inset space ~
49438 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
49441 \begin_layout Description
49443 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
49445 \begin_inset space ~
49449 \begin_inset Index idx
49452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49459 \begin_inset Index idx
49462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49463 Settings ! Date format
49468 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
49469 \begin_inset Newline newline
49473 \begin_inset Flex URL
49476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49478 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
49484 \begin_inset Newline newline
49487 For example the format
49488 \begin_inset Newline newline
49492 \begin_inset Newline newline
49495 prints the date as day/month/year.
49500 \begin_layout Description
49502 \begin_inset space ~
49506 \begin_inset space ~
49509 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
49510 is allowed to overwrite on export.
49513 \begin_layout Subsection
49519 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49521 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
49526 \begin_inset Index idx
49529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49530 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
49539 \begin_layout Description
49541 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
49543 \begin_inset space ~
49551 \begin_inset space ~
49555 \begin_inset space ~
49558 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
49563 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
49584 are used for Cyrillic.
49585 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
49586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49598 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
49600 sets up in the background.
49601 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
49606 \begin_layout Description
49608 \begin_inset space ~
49612 \begin_inset space ~
49616 \begin_inset space ~
49620 \begin_inset space ~
49623 options They only have an effect when the program
49627 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
49630 \begin_layout Standard
49631 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
49632 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
49633 manuals of the applications.
49636 \begin_layout Description
49638 \begin_inset space ~
49641 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
49642 \begin_inset space ~
49646 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49648 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
49655 \begin_layout Description
49657 \begin_inset space ~
49660 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
49661 \begin_inset space ~
49665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49667 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
49674 \begin_layout Description
49676 \begin_inset space ~
49679 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
49680 \begin_inset space ~
49684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49686 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
49693 \begin_layout Description
49699 \begin_inset space ~
49702 command Command for the program
49704 Check\SpecialChar TeX
49707 that is described in the section
49709 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
49714 Additional Features
49719 \begin_layout Standard
49720 There are additionally the following options:
49723 \begin_layout Description
49725 \begin_inset space ~
49729 \begin_inset space ~
49733 \begin_inset space ~
49737 \begin_inset space ~
49742 \begin_inset space ~
49745 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
49746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49763 to separate folders.
49764 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
49766 \begin_inset Index idx
49769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49776 \begin_inset Index idx
49779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49788 \begin_layout Description
49790 \begin_inset space ~
49794 \begin_inset space ~
49798 \begin_inset space ~
49802 \begin_inset space ~
49806 \begin_inset space ~
49810 \begin_inset space ~
49813 changes Removes all manually set
49819 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49820 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49822 \begin_inset space ~
49827 dialog when changing the document class.
49830 \begin_layout Section
49832 \begin_inset space ~
49836 \begin_inset Index idx
49839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49848 \begin_layout Subsection
49850 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49852 name "subsec:Converters"
49857 \begin_inset Index idx
49860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49869 \begin_layout Standard
49870 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
49871 from one format to another.
49872 You can modify converters or create new ones.
49873 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
49880 \begin_inset space ~
49885 field and press the
49890 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
49894 \begin_inset space ~
49899 drop-down list, modify the
49903 field and press the
49910 \begin_layout Standard
49913 Converter File Cache
49919 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
49921 Maximum Age (in days
49924 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
49925 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
49928 \begin_layout Standard
49929 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
49930 definition, is described in the section
49941 \begin_layout Subsection
49943 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49945 name "sec:File-Formats"
49950 \begin_inset Index idx
49953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49960 \begin_inset Index idx
49963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49972 \begin_layout Standard
49973 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
49983 programs that should be used for certain formats.
49986 \begin_layout Standard
49987 You can also define the
49989 Default output format
49991 that is used when you use
49993 View, Update, View Master Document
49997 Update Master Document
50003 menu or the toolbar.
50006 \begin_layout Standard
50007 More about formats and their options is described in the section
50018 \begin_layout Standard
50019 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
50021 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
50022 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
50023 This is done by specifying a
50028 More about this is described in the section
50039 \begin_layout Chapter
50040 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
50042 \begin_inset Index idx
50045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50054 name "chap:Units-available-in"
50061 \begin_layout Standard
50063 \begin_inset space ~
50067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50069 reference "tab:Units"
50073 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
50074 and used in this documentation.
50077 \begin_layout Standard
50078 \begin_inset Float table
50085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50086 \begin_inset Caption Standard
50088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50089 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50104 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
50110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50112 \begin_inset Tabular
50113 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
50114 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
50115 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
50116 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
50117 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
50119 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50167 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50200 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50204 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50266 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50270 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
50274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50431 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50435 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50468 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50472 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50505 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50509 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50541 scaled point (65536
50542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50546 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50554 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50609 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
50614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50733 % of original image width
50738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
50792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
50801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50822 \begin_layout Standard
50823 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50826 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
50833 \begin_layout Bibliography
50834 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50835 LatexCommand bibitem
50842 The \SpecialChar LyX
50844 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50847 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
50853 \begin_inset Newline newline
50857 \begin_inset Flex URL
50860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50862 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
50870 \begin_layout Bibliography
50871 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50872 LatexCommand bibitem
50873 key "latexcompanion"
50878 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
50880 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
50881 Companion Second Edition.
50884 Addison-Wesley, 2004
50887 \begin_layout Bibliography
50888 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50889 LatexCommand bibitem
50895 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
50898 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
50902 Addison-Wesley, 2003
50905 \begin_layout Bibliography
50906 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50907 LatexCommand bibitem
50916 : A Document Preparation System.
50919 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
50922 \begin_layout Bibliography
50923 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50924 LatexCommand bibitem
50934 The \SpecialChar TeX
50938 Addison-Wesley, 1984
50941 \begin_layout Bibliography
50942 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50943 LatexCommand bibitem
50949 The \SpecialChar TeX
50951 \begin_inset Newline newline
50955 \begin_inset Flex URL
50958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50960 http://texcatalogue.ctan.org/bytopic.html
50968 \begin_layout Bibliography
50969 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50970 LatexCommand bibitem
50976 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
50978 \begin_inset Newline newline
50982 \begin_inset Flex URL
50985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50987 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
50995 \begin_layout Bibliography
50996 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50997 LatexCommand bibitem
51004 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51006 name "Documentation"
51007 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
51014 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51018 \begin_inset Newline newline
51022 \begin_inset Flex URL
51025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51027 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
51035 \begin_layout Bibliography
51036 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51037 LatexCommand bibitem
51044 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51046 name "Documentation"
51047 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
51052 how to use the program
51054 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51058 \begin_inset Newline newline
51062 \begin_inset Flex URL
51065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51067 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
51075 \begin_layout Bibliography
51076 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51077 LatexCommand bibitem
51084 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51086 name "Documentation"
51087 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
51092 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51098 \begin_inset Index idx
51101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51103 packages ! biblatex
51109 \begin_inset Newline newline
51113 \begin_inset Flex URL
51116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51118 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
51126 \begin_layout Bibliography
51127 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51128 LatexCommand bibitem
51135 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51137 name "Documentation"
51138 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
51143 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51149 \begin_inset Index idx
51152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51160 \begin_inset Newline newline
51164 \begin_inset Flex URL
51167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51169 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
51177 \begin_layout Bibliography
51178 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51179 LatexCommand bibitem
51186 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51188 name "Documentation"
51189 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
51199 \begin_inset Newline newline
51203 \begin_inset Flex URL
51206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51208 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
51216 \begin_layout Bibliography
51217 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51218 LatexCommand bibitem
51219 key "makeindex-man"
51225 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51228 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
51238 \begin_inset Newline newline
51242 \begin_inset Flex URL
51245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51247 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
51255 \begin_layout Bibliography
51256 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51257 LatexCommand bibitem
51264 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51266 name "Documentation"
51267 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
51277 \begin_inset Newline newline
51281 \begin_inset Flex URL
51284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51286 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
51294 \begin_layout Bibliography
51295 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51296 LatexCommand bibitem
51303 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51305 name "Documentation"
51306 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
51311 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
51313 \begin_inset Newline newline
51317 \begin_inset Flex URL
51320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51322 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
51330 \begin_layout Bibliography
51331 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51332 LatexCommand bibitem
51339 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51341 name "Documentation"
51342 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
51347 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51353 \begin_inset Index idx
51356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51364 \begin_inset Newline newline
51368 \begin_inset Flex URL
51371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51373 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
51381 \begin_layout Bibliography
51382 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51383 LatexCommand bibitem
51390 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51392 name "Documentation"
51393 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
51398 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51404 \begin_inset Index idx
51407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51409 packages ! enumitem
51415 \begin_inset Newline newline
51419 \begin_inset Flex URL
51422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51424 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
51432 \begin_layout Bibliography
51433 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51434 LatexCommand bibitem
51441 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51443 name "Documentation"
51444 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
51449 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51455 \begin_inset Index idx
51458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51460 packages ! fancyhdr
51466 \begin_inset Newline newline
51470 \begin_inset Flex URL
51473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51475 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
51483 \begin_layout Bibliography
51484 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51485 LatexCommand bibitem
51492 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51494 name "Documentation"
51495 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
51500 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51506 \begin_inset Index idx
51509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51511 packages ! hyperref
51517 \begin_inset Newline newline
51521 \begin_inset Flex URL
51524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51526 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
51534 \begin_layout Bibliography
51535 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51536 LatexCommand bibitem
51543 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51545 name "Documentation"
51546 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
51551 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51557 \begin_inset Index idx
51560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51562 packages ! microtpye
51568 \begin_inset Newline newline
51572 \begin_inset Flex URL
51575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51577 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
51585 \begin_layout Bibliography
51586 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51587 LatexCommand bibitem
51594 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51596 name "Documentation"
51597 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
51602 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51608 \begin_inset Index idx
51611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51619 \begin_inset Newline newline
51623 \begin_inset Flex URL
51626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51628 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
51636 \begin_layout Bibliography
51637 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51638 LatexCommand bibitem
51645 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51647 name "Documentation"
51648 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
51653 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51659 \begin_inset Index idx
51662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51664 packages ! prettyref
51670 \begin_inset Newline newline
51674 \begin_inset Flex URL
51677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51679 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
51687 \begin_layout Bibliography
51688 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51689 LatexCommand bibitem
51696 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51698 name "Documentation"
51699 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
51704 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51710 \begin_inset Index idx
51713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51715 packages ! refstyle
51721 \begin_inset Newline newline
51725 \begin_inset Flex URL
51728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51730 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
51738 \begin_layout Bibliography
51739 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51740 LatexCommand bibitem
51747 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51750 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
51755 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51757 \begin_inset Newline newline
51761 \begin_inset Flex URL
51764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51766 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
51774 \begin_layout Bibliography
51775 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51776 LatexCommand bibitem
51783 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51786 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
51791 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51793 \begin_inset Newline newline
51797 \begin_inset Flex URL
51800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51802 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
51810 \begin_layout Bibliography
51811 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51812 LatexCommand bibitem
51819 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51822 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
51827 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51828 for Cyrillic languages:
51829 \begin_inset Newline newline
51833 \begin_inset Flex URL
51836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51838 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
51846 \begin_layout Bibliography
51847 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51848 LatexCommand bibitem
51855 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51858 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
51863 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51865 \begin_inset Newline newline
51869 \begin_inset Flex URL
51872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51874 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
51882 \begin_layout Bibliography
51883 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51884 LatexCommand bibitem
51891 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51894 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
51899 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51901 \begin_inset Newline newline
51905 \begin_inset Flex URL
51908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51910 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
51918 \begin_layout Bibliography
51919 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
51920 LatexCommand bibitem
51927 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51930 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
51935 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
51937 \begin_inset Newline newline
51941 \begin_inset Flex URL
51944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51946 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
51954 \begin_layout Standard
51955 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
51962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51989 \begin_inset Note Note
51992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51999 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
52000 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
52001 bibliography is the second one:
52009 \begin_layout Standard
52010 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
52011 LatexCommand bibtex
52012 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
52013 options "biblio/alphadin"
52020 \begin_layout Standard
52021 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52025 \begin_layout Standard
52029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52035 pagedeclaration}[1]{
52038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52044 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
52052 \begin_inset Note Note
52055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52056 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
52057 \begin_inset space ~
52061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52063 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
52075 \begin_layout Standard
52076 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
52077 LatexCommand printnomenclature
52083 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
52084 LatexCommand printindex